Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Sharp MX2300 MX2700 - SM PDF
Sharp MX2300 MX2700 - SM PDF
CODE: 00ZMX2700/S1E
MODEL
MX-2300/2700 G
MX-2300/2700 N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7]
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[i]
[8]
[J]
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[L]
[9]
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
CONTENTS
[E]
[F]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
F-1
F-2
F-2
F-4
[G]
DUPLEX SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
[H]
LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
[i]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-3
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
[4]
[5]
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
[J]
SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
2. List of simulation codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . K-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
[L]
TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[7]
[8]
[9]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
[M]
[N]
FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . N-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-7
[O]
[P]
DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
[C]
[D]
L-1
L-2
L-3
L-9
SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-7
[Q]
PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R]
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-7
[S]
MX2700N
Gas tube
Service
Manual
Lightning conductor
6)
2)
7)
8)
With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
4)
6)
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity.
8)
9)
2)
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2)
3)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
30 cm
30 cm
8)
45 cm
MX2700N
The user
authentication
Service
Manual
system by a login name, a password, and an e-mail address is employed to prevent against
unauthorized use of a third party and to limit the use quantity
and usable functions for each user group. In addition, the
user authentication by the optional IC card read/writer may
be used.
1. Product features
A. Features
(1)
1)
2)
Features
The employment of newly developed toner reduces the toner
consumption remarkably, realizing high fidelity pictures of
human skin, half tone, and hair. In addition, the employment of
"Auto Color" function, Sharp's unique auto recognition function, reproduces documents of difficult reproduction.
The power consumption for FAX standby with the power OFF
is 1W or less, reducing energy expenses of nighttime and load
to the environment.
5)
6)
3)
4)
(2)
Environmental features
1 : Dec. 15 2005
2. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
SPLC-c
driver
PCL5c/PCL6 Network
scanner
driver
(Sharpdesk 1 license)
CD
HDD
HDD
2. Document cover
(MX-VRX1)
RSPF
Copier/Printer (PCL)
/Scanner model
Copier/Printer (SPLC-c)
model
(MX-2300N)
(MX-2700N)
(MX-2300G)
(MX-2700G)
3. Stand/1x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX1)
17. Printer
expansion kit
(PCL)
4. Stand/2x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX2)
18. Network
scanner
expansion kit
1
19. PS3
expansion
kit
CD
(MX-PBX1)
CD
(MX-PKX1)
(For MX-2300G/2700G)
CD
(MX-NSX1)
Security
ROM
ROM
(AR-PF1)
16. CC authentication
version
15. Commercial
version
21. Sharpdesk
1 license kit
22. Sharpdesk
5 license kit
23. Sharpdesk
10 license kit
24. Sharpdesk
50 license kit
Security
ROM
CD
(MX-FWX1)
For document
control PWB
For document
control PWB
(MX-FRX1)
(MX-FRX1U)
CD
CD
(MX-USX1/
USX5)
(MX-US10/
US50)
25. Sharpdesk
100 license kit
27. Application
communication
module
28. External
account module
CD
CD
CD
CD
(MX-AMX1)
(MX-USA0)
(MX-AMX2)
26. Application
integration
module
(For MX-2300G/2700G)
(MX-AMX3)
B. Machine configuration
MX-2300G
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB)
Printer memory (System memory) (MB)
Copier
GDI printer
PCL printer
PS printer
EFI printer
Main body LCD
FAX
Scanner
Filing
HDD
RSPF
OC
Automatic duplex
Security
Internet Fax
MX-2300N
MX-2700G
MX-2700N
768
384
640
384
640
STD
STD
OP*3
OP *3
OP
OP
STD
STD
STD
OP*3
STD
OP*1
OP *3
STD
STD
STD
OP
OP
STD
OP*2
OP*3
STD
STD
Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
MX-RPX1
MX-VRX1
MX-DEX1
MX-DEX2
MX-LCX1
MX-TRX1
MX-RBX1
MX-FNX2
MX-FNX1
MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D
AR-PN1 A/B/C/D
MX-2300G
MX-2700G
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
MX-2300N
MX-2700N
STD
N/A
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
AR-PF1
MX-FRX1U
MX-FRX1
MX-PBX1
MX-NSX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FWX1
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-FXX1
MX-RKX1
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*1
OPT*1
OPT*2
OPT*1
OPT
OPT*3
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*3
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
31.
MX-SMX1
OPT
N/A
12.
13.
Electrical system (ROM)
Model name
MX-SCX1
AR-SC2
Remarks
(A4)
(Inner finisher)
(Common in current models)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Conventional model)
(Commercial version)
(Authentication version)
(PCL)
(Internet Fax)
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable option. Commercially available parts: Use the specified parts, recommended parts, or parts the operations of which have been confirmed. : Cannot be connected.
*1: Memory expansion is required. (256MB). *2: Printer expansion (PCL) and memory expansion are required.
*3:Installation of the MX-NSX1 or the MX-AMX1 is required. *4: Installation of the MX-NSX1 and expansion of memory (256MB) are required.
*5: No support for some areas.
MX2700N
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
(4)
ShifterManual
Service
Type
Paper weight
Paper size
1. Basic specifications
A. Base engine
(1)
Type
Type
Color support
(2)
Desk-top
Full color
Engine speed
Productivity
(A4, 8.5x11)
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
14
14
16
16
27
27
19
19
13
13
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
12
12
14
14
23
23
16
16
11
11
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
14
11
16
12
23
21
23
23
19
14
19
15
19
16
19
19
13
11
11
10
9
7
13
11
13
13
11
10
11
7
7
10
7
5
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
12
11
14
12
23
21
23
23
16
14
16
15
13
13
19
19
11
11
11
10
9
7
11
11
11
11
11
10
11
7
7
10
7
5
(3)
Shifter
55 209g/m2 (17 56 lbs)
Non offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR,11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
(Normal
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
output)
5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope, Extra
Offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x
8.5R (Not Envelope, Extra)
Non-offset
MX-2300G/N B/W
23cpm
(Normal
Color
23cpm
output)
MX-2700G/N B/W
27cpm
Color
27cpm
Offset
MX-2300G/N B/W
23cpm
mode
Color
23cpm
MX-2700G/N B/W
27cpm
Color
27cpm
30mm
Horizontal
Vertical
Between
direction
direction
Jobs
Non-offset
Not drop from
the tray.
Offset
Within 50mm
Within
Min.10mm
mode
10mm
Copying method
Developing system
Charging system
Transfer system
Cleaning system
Fusing system
Waste toner disposal
(5)
Engine resolution
Resolution
Writing:
600 x 600dpi
1200 x 600dpi (Monochome printing only.)
* Rotation output not allowed at 1200dpi x 600dpi. PS
expansion kit needed.
None
Smoothing
function
Gradation
(6)
Pre-heat
80 sec or less
* The value may be increased if process-control
processing is being executed. Same as current model
Yes
(8)
Writing:
Monochrome: 2 levels (1bit) / Equivalent of 256 steps
Color: Each color 2 levels (1bit) / Each color 16 levels
(4bits) / Equivalent of 256 steps
Warmup
Warmup time
(7)
Engine composition
Photoconductor kind
Offset range
Range of error
(In using the
recommended
paper, A4/8.5
x 11)
Approx.
60 sec
Printable area
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
7.25 x 10.5
Postcard
293 x 413mm
253 x 357mm
206 x 290mm
178 x 250mm
144 x 203mm
180 x 260mm
96 x 141mm
12 x 18 *
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5
8K
16K
279 x 432mm
275 x 425mm
212 x 349mm
212 x 323mm
212 x 272mm
136 x 209mm
266 x 383mm
191 x 263mm
(9)
Void area
Void area
Image loss
Top: 4 mm or less
Bottom: 3 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
Output
Count
Copy
Print
Scan
The decision -color N/A
The decision -color
or monochrome- is
or monochrome- is
decided when the
decided when the
document is
document is
scanned.
scanned.
The scanning
The scanning
speed for color is
speed for color is
always adopted.
always adopted.
N/A
For the output of a black-white original,
the decision to switch from color mode
to black-white mode is made when the
drum running distance shortens.
First copy (print):
If a fixed number of black-white pages
are contained in a series, switch from
color mode to black-white mode, starting
with the first page of the batch. If the
original starts with a black-white page,
the output will start in the black-white
mode.
From the second copy (print) on:
The condition is completely understood.
If there are a fixed number of blackwhite pages in a series, switch to the
black-white mode, starting with the first
page in the series.
Black-white count for the pages recognized as black-white.
Color count for the pages recognized as colored.
For N-UP, a page will be counted as a color page if there is at
least one colored page inserted upon N-UP.
100V type
100 127V 12A
50/60Hz
Fixed type (direct)
200V type
220 240V 8A
Inlet type
100V type
1.44kW
200V type
1.84kW
Form
Feeding method
Heater (Engine part)
(2)
Feeding method
Heater (Engine part)
Paper size
Changing of paper
size
Paper type setting
Default paper size
setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
Paper Type
(3)
Paper Size
(13) Noise
Standby
B/W
Color
B/W
: 63dB or less
: 63dB or less
: 55dB or less
(14) Dimensions
Outer dimensions
(W x D x H)
(with Multi
Manual)
Footprint (W x D)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G
620 x 670 x 795mm
(24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x
31 inch)
MX-2300N/MX-2700N
620 x 670 x 950mm
(24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x
37 26/64 inch)
590 x 670mm
(23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
590 x 670mm
(23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G
Approx. 102kg (225lbs)
Approx. 106kg (234lbs)
MX-2300N/MX-2700N
Approx. 112kg (247lbs)
Approx. 116kg (256lbs)
Changing of
paper size
Paper type setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
(15) Weight
Main unit
Main unit +
Developer +
Toner cartridge
In action
Paper Type
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Envelope (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Western 2 / Western 4)
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Guide adjustment by users
Yes
Thin paper: 55 59g/m 2 (15 16 lbs)
Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Heavy Paper: 106 209g/m2 (28+ 56 lbs)
Envelope: 75 90g/m2 (20 24 lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Gloss Paper
Standard paper: 100 sheets
Envelope: 20 sheets
OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
Tab paper: 20 sheets
Gloss paper: 20 sheets
Other special paper: 1 sheet
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (Excluding back print
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper, thin paper, label
paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
Paper size
detection
Auto Detect
Auto-AB
Auto Detect
Auto-Inch
For China
Detection of
remaining paper
(4)
(7)
Form
Scan speed
Copy
yes or no only
Double-sided
Fax
Method
Paper size
Non-Stack
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
8.5 x 5.5R
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored paper
Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Paper type
Paper weight
(for duplex operation)
Logo paper support
(5)
(6)
For paper such as letterhead paper with frontback attributes, the engine control must be cared
for printing side.
Exit location/
method
Exit capacity
Scanner
Internet
Fax
Document setup
direction
Document standard
location
Document transport
method
Document sizes
No
Yes
Yes
No
* Option (MX-TRX1)
Form
Transport standard
Ejecting location/
method
Tray capacity
Ejected paper size/
type
Full tray detection
Shifter
Dimensions
Weight
Installation/
maintenance
Optional detection
Packaged items
Document
weights
1-side
2-side
Document carrying
capacity
Types of document
that may not be
transported
Paper detection
Paper feeding
direction
Document inversion
Simultaneous doublesided scanning
Maintenance parts
Power source
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Original cover
Scan Range
Original Cover
Standard
Location
Detection
Detection Size
Yes
Not allowed
Paper feed roller, pick-up roller, separation roller
Provided from the main unit
35.8W
W590 x D510 x H155 (mm)
W23-15/64 x D20-5/64 x H6-7/64 (inch)
Approx. 10kg (22.0lbs)
Heater
(Scanner part)
297 x 432mm
Left back as standard
Yes
Auto Detect (One type of detection unit to be switched
for software destination)
Inch
<INCH-1>
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
<INCH-2>
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB
<AB-1>
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
<AB-2>
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 x 330
<AB-3>
8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K, 16KR
Service parts
D. Fuser section
(1)
Type
System
C. Scanner section
(1)
(2)
Scan
resolution (dpi)
Original
Cover
RSPF
Copy mode
Monochrome
Color
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
(Scanner)
100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(FAX)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391 dpi)
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi
Transmission
resolution (dpi)
Image
process
Exposure lamp
Scan Levels
Output levels
PC-FAX/
PC-Internet
Fax
Network
75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN
400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Xenon
10bits
FAX mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black & White: 1bit
Gray Scale: 8bit
Full Color: Each color RGB 8bit
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1)
a. Tray 1 4, LCC
Model name
MX-2700G/N
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
Color
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
B/W
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
13
13
13
13
11
11
11
11
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
A4R, B5R,A5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR
Extra
b. Manual feed
Model name
MX-2700G/N
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
Color
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
B/W
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
11
12
21
23
14
15
16
19
11
10
7
11
13
10
11
12
21
23
14
15
16
19
11
10
7
11
13
10
14
16
23
23
19
19
19
19
13
11
9
13
13
11
14
16
23
23
19
19
19
19
13
11
9
13
13
11
11
12
21
23
14
15
13
19
11
10
7
11
11
10
11
12
21
23
14
15
13
19
11
10
7
11
11
10
12
14
23
23
16
16
13
19
11
11
9
11
11
11
12
14
23
23
16
16
13
19
11
11
9
11
11
11
10
10
11
11
10
10
11
11
7
5
7
5
7
7
7
7
7
5
7
5
7
7
7
7
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K
B5
A4R, 16KR
8.5 x 11R
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
A3W, 12 x 18
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x
11, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH)
*1
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW) *1
Heavy paper (Other sizes)
(2)
Platen/RSPF
Platen
RSPF
b. BLI standard
B/W
6.3 sec
11.6 sec
Color
8.9 sec
16.9 sec
Copy
method
[Measuring Conditions]
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 (landscape) paper from the main unit tray 1
* No Auto Color Selection and No Auto Color for color
Job speed
S to S
D to D
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
24cpm
23cpm
(89%)
(85%)
21cpm
20cpm
(78%)
(74%)
21cpm
19cpm
(78%)
(70%)
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
20cpm
20cpm
(89%)
(85%)
19cpm
18cpm
(83%)
(78%)
19cpm
17cpm
(83%)
(74%)
S to S
S to D
* Polygon in rotation
(3)
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
23cpm
23cpm
(100%)
(100%)
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
the first copy)
Monochrome: 600 x 300dpi and color: 600 x 600dpi (default)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 5
c. Bertl standard
Model name / Mode
Copy
method
S to S
S to D
D to D
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
23cpm
21cpm
(84%)
(78%)
14cpm
12cpm
(52%)
(44%)
20cpm
19cpm
(74%)
(70%)
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
19cpm
18cpm
(84%)
(78%)
13cpm
11cpm
(57%)
(48%)
18cpm
17cpm
(78%)
(74%)
(4)
Continuous copy
(5)
999 sheets
Copy document
Zoom
Preset
magnification ratio
XY zoom
No
Yes
Yes
Allowed by system setting
Allowed by system setting (automatic-manual)
Automatic paper
selection
Automatic
magnification selection
Paper type select
Auto tray switching
Rotated copy
Normal:
Electronic sort
Rotated sort
1:10.8%
AB series:
Job reservation
Program call/
registration.
Preheat function
Auto power shutoff
Yes
Exposure mode
Copy document
mode
Color emphasis
Manual steps
Toner save mode
(9)
Yes
Copy
magnification ratio
(8)
Function
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
Document
Document type
(7)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Resolution
Scan resolution
Writing resolution
(6)
RGB adjustment
Color balance
Saturation
adjustment
Brightness
adjustment
Contrast
adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
Background
removal
Auto color
calibration
Registration
adjustment
Auto Color
Selection copy
Full color mode
2-color mode
Special
function
User authentication
Process control
Tandem copy
Mixed document
feeder
Document paper size
input
Indeterminate paper
size input
2-sided copy direction
switch
Margin shift
Edge/center erase
Dual page copy
Cover/insertion
Tab paper insertion
OHP insertion
Tab copy
Centering
2in1/4in1
Pamphlet
Card shot
Book copy
Large capacity
document mode
Black-white Inversion
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror image
Photo repeat
Special
function
Date print
Character
Stamp
Page printing
Shading
Proof copy
Document Control
c. Image processing
Mode
Original scanning
color
Auto color selection
Mode
Scanner
Internet
Fax
IP-FAX
(2)
Halftone
reproduction
Density adjustment
System environment
Scanner
Internet
Fax
(3)
Scan to e-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to e-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP
Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
No
Copier memory
(Local memory)
768MB
(Standard)
768MB
(Standard)
Printer memory
(System Memory)
640MB (Expansion
required for G model)
640MB (Expansion
required for G model)
HDD (Standard)
Mode
Corresponding
server
/protocol
Scanner
SMTP
FTP(TCP/IP)
SMB
Internet Fax
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
Scanner
Monochrome: TIFF, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
Color: Gray scale, color
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
[Monochrome]
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Huffman)
G4
= MMR (Modified MR)
[Color/Gray scale]
JPEG (High, middle,
low)
Yes
Internet Fax
Monochrome TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
b. Support image
Mode
File format
Compression
method
MH, MMR
Internet Fax
B/W
---
Auto + 5 steps
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same as that
of "Manual = 3" when
selecting full color/
grayscale.)
Black-white enabled
Auto
Manual
Auto + 5 steps
---
Data saving
destination
HDD (Standard)
a. Support system
Scanner
Full color, grayscale, B/W
Selection of image
quality
Resolution
(depends on file
format/transmission
method)
200 x 100dpi
(Half tone not allowed)
200 x 200dpi
200 x 400dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi
Moire reduction
mode
Notes' security
feature
Yes (Color/grayscale)
---
---
d. Specification of Addresses
Mode
Address
specification
---
Setting of default
address *1
Number of Onetouch address key
registration
Number of Group (1
key) address
registtation
Program
Direct entry of
addresses
Chain dial
Resend
Scanner
Internet Fax
Specification by one-touch/group/direct address
entry.
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Yes
--Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Mode
Shortcut for address
selection (quick
key)
CC/BCC sending
Subjet
File name
Sender name
Transmission
message (message
body)
Preset mail footer *2
Disable direct entry
transmission *3
Disable PC- Fax
sending
Disable Internet Fax
sending
Scanner
Internet Fax
Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
addresses.
Yes
--Selective/direct entry from the list
Selective/direct entry from the list
Selective/direct entry
--from the list/selection
(1 default address fixed
from LDAP server
as sender name)
Selective/direct entry from the list.
(Number of characters: Maximum of 1800 half-size
characters (888 full size characters))
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scanner
Yes (500 destinations)
(e-mail/FTP/Desktop
allowed)
Internet Fax
Yes (500 destinations)
Memory transmission
Rotated transmission
Scaled transmission
Recall mode
Error
Busy
Long original
transmission
Change of the number
of pages for each file
Job partition through
recognition of white
paper.
Restriction on
transmission size
Large capacity original
mode
Scanning of thin paper
Mixed originals feeder
Default date sender
transmission
Scanner
Internet Fax
94 destinations in all
--Yes
Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a
fixed size to another. Reduction may be done
on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending.
--Yes
------Number/time to be
set up through
system setup
Yes
Maximum of 800mm (single side only/blackwhite 2 values only)
Yes
--No
---
Yes
---
Scanner
Internet Fax
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Memory reception
Fixed size reduced
reception
Specified size scaled
reception
Rotated reception
Setting of received data
print condition
2-sided reception
---------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
No
-----
Yes
No
---
2-in-1 reception
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
A3
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
letter
Address/Domainspecified reception
allowed
Address/Domainspecified reception not
allowed. (To be rejected)
Received data bypass
output
Reception confirmation
cycle setting
POP3 communications
timeout setting
Index printing
Body text print select
setting
Transfer function upon
disabling of output.
Internet Fax/Fax to email (Transfer of Internet
Fax/Fax reception data
to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting
Insertion of job
separator sheet
Staple function of
received data
Auto wake up print *1
Received data print hold
*2
Color toner print when
black toner runs out.
Fax response lamp
-----
Condition setting
through system setting
No
Yes
---
Yes
---
---
---
Yes
---
-----------
-----
Yes
No
---
Yes
-----
Yes
Yes
---
No
---
Yes
*1: The auto wake up print for Internet Fax is a pseudo night-time
mode with main power source (primary) switch ON and main
unit power (secondary) switch OFF. Following the interval of
the reception confirmation cycle, it allows reception of the data
from a POP server (if there are any) and launch the main unit
for output. (It cannot attain the pseudo night-time mode if the
main power source (primary) switch is off. In this case, this
function is not supported.)
*2: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out
put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.)
Setting only on the reciver side.
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
---
g. Reception function
h. Report/list function
Transaction report
Address/phone number
table
Group table
Program table
Communication original
contents print
List of addresses
allowed or not allowed
for reception
Scanner
Internet Fax
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Always print/Upon
error/no print
Yes
---
Scanner
Yes
-------
Page partition
transmission
Page connection
Edge erase
Center erase
2 in 1
Yes
Confirm transmission
Forward data
transmission/reception
(Document Admin)
Internet Fax
Yes
Yes
Yes (Date can be
expressed
alternatively)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
(Allowed for Fax /
Internet Fax
broadcast)
Yes
--(Only color and gray
scale)
Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper
width. The maximum enlargement is not
allowed to exceed 400%)
--Yes
Timeout time Setting
for 1 minute 240
hours/each minute
Yes
Data transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax
is allowed, too.
l. Sound settings
Mode
Reception sound
Communication
error sound
Sound setting for
end of original
reading (image
send)
Scanner
-----
Internet Fax
293mm / 11-17/32
A3 A5/11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5
Scanner
Internet Fax
999 destinations
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for each group
dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size character (36
half-size characters)
Yes
----Yes
Registration by using
Web or NST (network
scanner tool) *2
Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in
one set is allowed. (48 of them)
Item
Sound volume setting
Sound volume setting
Scanner
-----
Yes *1
Internet Fax
Yes *1
Yes *2
Scanner
--Yes
Internet FAX
Yes
No
C. PC-Fax functions
(1)
OS
PC
CPU
Monitor
k. Registration-related settings
Program
j. Record size
Mode
One-touch/group *1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
Internet Fax
Default address setup
Desktop registration
1 (20 characters)
Mode
Maximum record width
Record size
Internet Fax
---
*3: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
Time specification
Sender print
Page number print
Date print
Card shot
Number of sender
registration
Quick key (short cut
registration) *4
Retrieving/scanning of
registered data to other
model
Import/export of address
book
Scanner
200 (user registration
from Web) *3
---
i. Other Functions
Background removal
Mode
Sender registration
Memory
HDD
Interface
Communications
protocol
(2)
PC-Fax Send
Resolution
Transmission original
sizes
Compression method
Braodcast transmission
F code transmission
Phone book
registration/
transmission function
Use of MFP phone book
Attach a cover sheet
Create cover sheets
function
Sender print
Preview function
Transmission
confirmation (Notice to
PC by NJR)
Document filing function
PC-Fax Transmission
log
User authentication
Timer
R-KEY (SEEG/SEF
only)
No
Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
Yes
Selection of illuminant
color
Selection of threshold
value
Addition of void area
Save of setup contents
Save of preview image
Display unit of
scanning range
Notes's security
function
Image acquision
method from the main
unit
(1)
2-sided scan
Color modes
Resolutions
Scanning ranges
Preview function
Zoom preview function
Rotated scan
Brightness/contrast
adjustment
Gamma adjustment
Color matching
Edge emphasis
Black-white inversion
Yes
Non-compression
Platform
(2)
Support OS
Custom PS
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9,
x 10.4
Windows 98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Custom
PCL5c/6
Filing
Yes
Quick File
Yes
Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
PPD
Yes
No
Yes
SPLC-c
OS's
WHQL validated OS's
Hardware environment
NIC
Yes
USB
No
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
Windows 2000/XP
System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of
colors must be available.
Other: Network port
Yes
Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Grayscale/Full
Color
75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
A3/A4/A4-R/A5/A5-R/B4/B5/B5-R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11-R/7.25 x 10.5/7.25 x 10.5-R/
8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5-R/8.5 x 14/Postcard/
8K/16K/16K-R/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). "Auto
(Mixed size)" means random.
Yes
Yes
Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Auto/ manual (-100 +100)
E. Printer function
Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
WHQL
(3)
Command system
Command system
SPLC-c
PCL5c compatible
PCL6 compatible
BMLinkS
PS3 compatible
EFI controller
(4)
MX-2300G/2700G
MX-2300N/2700N
Standard
No
Option (Printer
Standard
expansion kit: MXPBX1)
No
Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
No
Installed fonts
For PCL5c/
PCL6
compatible
For PS3
Yes
None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Yes
Standard (MX2300N/2700N)
Option (MX2300G/2700G)
Option
Option
(5)
Print channel
Support print
channel
USB
PSERVER/
RPRINT for
NetWare
environment
LPR
IPP
PAP:
EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
(8)
FTP
NetBEUI
Port9100
(6)
Command Compatibility
PCL5c
compatibility
PCL XL
compatibility
PostScript
compatibility
(7)
Environmental settings
Setting item
Initial setting
PCL seting
PS setting
Overview
Basic settings for printer use such as number of
copies or printing direction.
Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
Print functions
Function
Content
PCL6/5c
(G model:
option)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multiple Pamphlet
Bar code font
Network tandem print
Encryption PDF/PDF/
TIFF/JPEG direct print
E-Mail To Print
Pull print from front panel
Print by file setup on Web
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function
ROPM
Multi-access
Paper direction setting for
2-sided printing of
letterhead paper and prepunched paper.
Enable selected paper
type in bypass tray
Setting environmental
control under terminal
server control
Driver delivery function
Form overlay
Planet Press
Improvement of
downloading method of
font form
Management of password
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list
PS (Option)
SPLC-c
(G model)
Yes
No
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job
even if the unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the
application assuming printout on continuous pages.
The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP
processing.
RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed
during scanning.
Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed
correctly in front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not
match with those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of
the driver regardless of the setup values on the main unit side.
Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print
create environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(5c only)
No
No
No
Function
Content
Document control
Object judgement (screen
change/color change)
CMYK Simulation
ICC Profile
Pantone color
(9)
Function
Paper Size
Paper Selection
Pamphlet
(Pamphlet
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware)
Binding Edge
N-Up Printing
Black N-Up
Border
N-Up Order
PCL5-c/6
PS
PS (Option)
SPLC-c
(G model)
Yes
No
Yes (OPT)
Yes (OPT)
Yes (OPT)
PCL6: Yes
PCL5: No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Function
Copies (Copy
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware)
Orientation
Duplex
PCL6/5c
(G model:
option)
No
SPLC-c
1-999
PPD
Different Paper
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
2-Up Pamphlet
N/A
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple 2-Up
N/A
Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled
N/A
Pamphlet
Top/Left/Right
N/A
1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up,
(Windows NT: N/A)
8-Up, 9-Up, 16-Up
(Windows 9x:
1-Up/2-Up/4-up)
Yes/No
N/A
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
Transparency
Inserts
Tab Printing
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
A2 (Fit To
N/A
A2 (Fit To
N/A
Page)
Page)
(PCL6 only)
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14,
7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5,
COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Paper Source
Auto
Paper Type
Selection/
Paper
Source /
Paper Type
Cover Page
N/A
Last Page
N/A
Other Page
N/A
Blank/Printed
Image Shift
Tab Paper
Printing
(PCL6 only)
Set Paper Size
Set Paper Type
Display Name
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MX-LCX1
None/Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher
None/2 Holes/3 Holes/4 Holes/4 Holes (Wide)
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
PCL5-c/6
600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
1200 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
(monochrome only)
300 x 300dpi
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color(CMYK)/Monochrome (K only)
N/A
OFF
N/A
OFF
System (Windows ICM). Effective only when Color Options is Custom.
Windows NT: N/A
Printer
N/A
Printer
N/A
Driver
N/A
When ICM Method is anything other than Custom: Default
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
When ICM Method is Custom:
Perceptual matching
Saturation matching
Relative colorimetric
Absolute colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
When Windows ICM is off:
Source Profile (Monitor
Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
When Windows ICM is off:
None
Profile)
sRGB
sRGB
None
Apple RBG
Apple RGB
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
1 bit or 2 bit
1bit only
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
N/A
2 bit or 4 bit
0-100
N/A
N/A
0-100
N/A
0-100
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
In case of Yes:
Default /Custom
None
N/A
Off/
Default/Custom
N/A
N/A
None
(PCL6 only)
Image Type
Neutral Grays (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
0-100
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
Standard/Graphics/Photo/Custom
N/A
N/A
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
e. Font
Function
Font Source
PCL5-c/6
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
PS
SPLC-c
Resident Font
Download Font
N/A
TrueType (Type 42)
N/A
Bitmap (Type 3)
N/A
N/A
Adobe
N/A
(Type1)
As Graphics
N/A
PPD
N/A
Yes
Function
Auto Job
Control Review
Tandem Print
Set Tandem
Print
Auto
Configuration
PCL5-c/6
PS
Yes/No
SPLC-c
Yes/No
IP Address (Slave Machine)
PPD
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
f. Other functions
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Rotate 180
degrees
Collate
Carbon Copy
Fit To Page
Poster
Poster Dash
Border
Poster Overlap
Margin Shift
(Margin Shift
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware
Zoom
Mirror Image
Graphics Mode
PS Pass
Through
PS Error
Printing
Job
Compression
Retention
Document
Filing
User
Authentication
Job ID
Notify Job End
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
Transparent Text
Overwrite Text
Outline Text
Image Stamp
Yes
(PCL6
only)
Create Overlay
Load Overlay
Delete
Query Page Overlay
Yes/No
PPD
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
Top Copy
N/A
Carbon Copy
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
N/A
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5/8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch
2 x 2/3 x 3/
2 x 2/3 x 3/4 x 4
N/A
4x4
(PCL6
only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
(PCL6
only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
(PCL6
only)
None/10mm (0.4 inch)/20mm (0.8 inch)/30mm (1.2
inch)
N/A
N/A
Vector /
Raster
N/A
N/A
N/A
25% 400%
X-Y Zoom
N/A
No Mirror
Image
Vertical
Horizontal
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/
Fastest/Fast/
Medium/Best
Compression
Hold Only
Hold After Printd
Sample Print
Password
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
Yes/No
Function
Copies
Orientation
Duplex
Pamphlet (Pamphlet
processing by MFP/
Printer firmware)
Binding Edge
N-Up Printing
N-Up Border
N-Up Order
Function
Paper Size Setting
Paper Selection
Different Paper
Transparency Inserts
Tab Printing
Set Tray Status
Paper Type Name
(USER TYPE 1-7)
Input Tray Options
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K,
16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Auto Select
Paper Source
Paper Type
Cover Page
Blank/Printed
N/A
N/A
Yes
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
N/A
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
N/A
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
1-999
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Long)
2-Sided (Short)
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
(Only more than 10.2)
Top/Left/Right
N/A
Top/Left/Right
1-Up/2-Up/4-Up/6-Up/9-Up/16-Up
Yes/No
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
N/A
None
Vertical
Horizontal
OS9 PPD
Staple
Punch
No Offset
Large Capacity Tray
Output Tray Options
N/A
Punch Module
N/A
N/A
Right Tray
N/A
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MXN/A
None/MXLCX1
LCX1
N/A
None /
None/
Finisher/
Finisher/
Saddle Stitch
Saddle Stitch
Finisher
Finisher
N/A
None /
None /
2 Holes /
2 Holes /
3 Holes /
3 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes
4 Holes
(Wide)
(Wide)
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method ColorSync
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
Rendering Intent
* Specification
depending on OS
ICC Profile Selection
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
Print Priority
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Contrast
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Brightnesst
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Saturationt
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Color Balance (RGB)
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Text To Black
Vector To Black
Toner Save (1bit only)
Screen Setting
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Pure Black Print
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Bitmap Compression
Image Type
Neutral Grays
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
e. Font
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color (CMYK) /Monochrome (K only)
OFF
N/A
OFF
System
N/A
System
(10.3 only)
Printer
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
N/A
Source
Source
Profile
Profile
(Monitor
(Monitor
Profile)
Profile)
sRGB
sRGB
Apple RGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Custom
(10.3 only)
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
Function
Font Source (Resident
Font/Download Font)
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
0-100
N/A
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Rotate 180 degrees
Collate
Carbon Copy
Fit To Page
Poster
Black Poster Border
Poster Overlap
Margin Shift
(Margin Shift
processing by MFP/
Printer firmware
Zoom
Mirror
Graphics Mode
PS Pass through
PS Error Printing
Job Compression
Retention
0-100
Document Filing
User Authentication
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Transparent Text/Overwrite Text/Outline Text
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
None/10mm/20mm/30mm (1.2inch)
25% 400%
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Auto Configuration
N/A
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
N/A
Login Name
Password
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standard/Graphic/Photo/CAD/Custom
Black Only
4-Color
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom
Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes/No
IP Address
(Slave
Machine)
Yes
(10.3 only)
Basic function
Main folder
Custom folder
Quick file folder
Main folder
Custom folder
Quick file folder
Off
Default
Custom
OSX 10.2/3/4
N/A
Yes
Job ID
N/A
OSX 10.1
N/A
f. Other functions
N/A
N/A
OS9 PPD
Maximum number of
user folder
Number of users
allowed for registration
10GB
10GB
1,400 pages or 1,000
files (SHARP standard
document)
1,400 pages or 1,000
files (SHARP standard
document)
(2)
3. Ambient conditions
Copy
Printer
Direct print (FTP)
Direct print (e-mail)
Direct print (Web)
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Scan to SMB
Scan to USB
memory
Fax reception
Fax transmission
Internet Fax
reception
Internet Fax
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet
Fax transmisson
Remote PC Scan
Scan to HDD
Main/Custom Folder
Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
---------
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
--No
--Yes
--Yes
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
Humidity (RH)
90%
Safety standards
60%
Safety standard
EMC
(2)
100V type
Electrical safety law:
J60950(compliant)
UL60950, 21CFR
(Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
VCCI Class A
FCC Class B
High harmonic guideline
ICES Class B (Canada)
CNS 13438 (Taiwan)
Validation of Technology
Standard Conformance
(Electrical
Communications Project
Law)
FCC part 68
ICCS-03
PSTN01 (Taiwan)
200V type
EN60950
IEC60825 (Laser)
GB4943 (China)
20%
EN55022 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
GB9254, GB17625.1,
GB/T17618 (China)
TS 103 021, EG 201
120, EG 201 121
(Europe)
AS/ACIF S0002
(Australia)
GB/T 3382.1-2003, GB/T
3382.2-2003, YD/T 5141998, YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993, YD/T
965-1998, YD/T 9931998 (China)
Environmental Readiness
Photoconductor drum
2)
3)
60%
20%
1 : Dec. 15 2005
MX2700N
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
Service Manual
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27NTBA
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTYA
x1
100K
MX-27NVBA
x1
60K
MX-27NVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27NRSA
Drum Unit
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27NUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27GTBA
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTYA
x1
100K
MX-27GVBA
x1
60K
MX-27GVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27GRSA
Drum Unit
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27GUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
C. Asia-Subsidiary/Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27ATBA
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATYA
x1
100K
MX-27AVBA
x1
60K
MX-27AVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27ARSA
Drum Unit
x1
x1
MX-27AUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
1 : Dec. 15 2005
D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27FTBA
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTYA
x1
100K
MX-27FVBA
x1
60K
MX-27FVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27FRSA
Drum Unit
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27FUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
E. China
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27CTBA
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTYA
x1
100K
MX-27CVBA
x1
60K
MX-27CVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27CRSA
Drum Unit
x1
x1
MX-27CUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Item
Heat roller kit
4
5
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
DV seal kit
7
8
9
10
11
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper thermistor sub
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower thermistor
Lower heat roller bearing
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
Transfer cleaning roller
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary drive idle gear
Upper thermistor
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Ozone filter PA
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3)
x1
x1
x4
x1
x2
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
For service rotation
For service rotation
For service rotation (Heater lamp 120V)
For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V)
x3
x3
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
Life
200K
Model name
MX-270HK
100K
MX-270Y1
300K
MX-270Y2
100K
50K
MX-270FL
MX-270HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-270DS
5000 times
5000 times
AR-SC2
MX-SCX1
MX-270U1
MX-270U2
MX-270FU1
MX-270FU
Life
200K
Model name
MX-270UH
200K
MX-270LH
100K
MX-270B1
300K
MX-270X1
300K
300K
MX-270B2
MX-270X2
100K
50K
MX-270FL
MX-270HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-270DS
5000 times
5000 times
AR-SC2
MX-SCX1
MX-270U1
MX-270U2
MX-270FU
MX-270FU2
Remarks
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
No.
1
Item
Upper heat roller kit
5
6
7
8
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
DV seal kit
10
11
12
13
14
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper thermistor sub
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower thermistor
Lower heat roller bearing
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
Transfer cleaning roller
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary drive idle gear
Upper thermistor
Ozone filter PA
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x3)
x1
x1
x4
x1
x2
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
For service rotation
For service rotation
For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V)
For service rotation (Heater lamp 100V)
x3
x3
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
Remarks
C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge
Part name
10
Toner color
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. The laser
print shows the production year and month.
Production
place
1:
2:
3:
4:
5/6:
7:
8/9:
10:
Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. H for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the day of the day of packing.
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "C" for China.
Destination
Incompatibility
Production
year/month/day
Version
Serial No. in production day
Example: 134th of production on August 24, 2005
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1:
2:
3/4:
5/6:
7:
8:
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Number
Indicates the production day.
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
MX2700N
Service Manual
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1
2
3 4
8
When the option (the finisher) is
installed (When the option (the
saddle stitch finisher) is not installed.).
9 10 11 12 13
No.
1
2
Name
Document cover
Auto document feeder *1, *2
Front cover
4
5
6
7
8
9
Interface unit *1
Operation panel
Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) *1
Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Finisher *1
Saddle stitch finisher *1
10
11
12
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (When the stand/1 x 500 sheet
paper drawer or the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 4 (When the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 5 (When the large capacity paper
feed tray is installed) *1
13
14
14
Function/ Operation
Holds a document.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch or replacing
the toner cartridge.
Feeds the output paper to the saddle finisher.
Used to set the functions and enter the copy quantity.
Receives discharged paper if installed and set.
Copied or printed paper is discharged to this tray.
Staples paper, and makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Staples and outputs paper. It is also provided with the center-stapling
function. Makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
*1: Peripheral unit (option): The peripheral units are options. Some model is provided with this unit as a standard unit.
*2: The MX-2300N/2700N are equipped standard with peripheral unit.
Note
B. Internal structure
8 9
5 6
10 11 12 13
No.
1
Toner cartridge
Fusing section
Transfer belt
5
6
10
11
Handle
2-stage paper feed desk right side
cover (When the 2-stage paper feed
desk is installed)
Paper feed tray right side cover
Right side cover open lever
Press this button to release lock of the waste toner box when replacing
the waste toner box or cleaning the wiring unit.
Used to lift the machine for transit.
Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 3 or 4.
12
13
Name
Function/ Operation
Contains toner. If toner is exhausted, remove the cartridge of
exhausted color and replace it with a new one.
Fuses images transferred on paper by heat.
In full color copy, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the
transfer belt. In black copy, black toner images are shifted to the
transfer belt.
This cover is opened to operate the fusing section pressure
adjustment lever or to remove a paper jam.
Used to reverse paper in duplex print or to remove a paper jam.
In manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When paper
greater than A4R or 8-1/2 x 11 R, be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray.
Turns on the power of the machine. When FAX or internet is used,
keep it ON.
Note
10
8
Document cover
10
No.
1
2
Name
Document feed roller
Document feed section cover
3
4
Document guide
Document set table
5
6
9
10
Document stocker
Document table (Glass surface)
Function/ Operation
Transports a document automatically.
This cover is opened when removing a paper jam or cleaning the
document feed roller.
Guides to scan a document properly. Set to the set document size.
A document is set on this table. In the case of a single-surface
document, set it face up.
The scanned document is discharged to this section.
The document set on the document set table is scanned in this
section.
Detects the size of a document set on the document table (glass
surface).
When scanning a document, it is temporarily discharged to this
section to be reversed for scanning the back surface.
Stores documents.
Used for thick documents or book documents which cannot be
entered to the auto document feeder.
Note
D. Connectors
1
2
3
Service-only connector
No.
1
2
3
Name
USB connector (Type A)
USB connector (Type B)
LAN connector
Function/ Operation
Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.
Note
E. Operation panel
PRINT
READY
DATA
DOCUMENT
FILING
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
6
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
4
5
6
8
9
10
[CA] key
11
12
13
[STOP] key
[BLACK START] key
[COLOR START] key
14
15
[Power] key
16
10
11
Function/ Operation
A message or a key is displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the
displayed key with your finger to perform various operations. When the
displayed key is touched, a sound is generated and the selected item is
highlighted to confirm.
Used to switch the display mode of the touch panel. The lamp of the
selected key is lighted.
[Document Filing] key
Press this key to switch to the document filing mode in order to store
a document to the hard disk in the form of a image or to print or send
the image stored in the hard disk.
[FAX/Image send] key ([Image send] key for the models without the
FAX function)
Press this key to switch to the FAX mode/network scanner in order to
use the FAX function or the scanner function.
Communicating lamp
This lamp is lighted during sending or receiving in the FAX mode, and
lighted during sending in the scanner mode.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes when FAX data cannot be outputted due to paper
empty, etc. If there is data which has not been sent, the lamp is
lighted.
[COPY] key
Press this key to switch to the copy mode in order to use the copy
function. When this key is pressed continuously, the total copy
quantity and the toner remaining quantity can be checked.
Ready lamp
When this lamp is lighted, print data can be received.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes during reception of print data, and lights up during
printing.
Used to enter the copy quantity or the FAX number, etc.
Used to clear the set value of copy quantity, etc. to 0.
Press this key to display the job status. On the job status screen, the
details of the job can be checked and the job can be terminated.
When this key is pressed, the system setting menu screen is displayed
to allow the paper feed tray setting, destination registration, and other
setting for easy operations of this machine.
Used to logout after user authentication. Used to deliver the tone signal
in the dial line when the FAX function is used.
Used to use the job program when the copy function is used, and to dial
when the FAX function is used.
Press this key to reset the operation, cancel setting, and start from the
initial state.
Used to stop copying and scanning a document.
Used to scan a document in black.
Used to make a color copy in the copy mode and to scan a document in
colors. When the FAX or the internet FAX is used, this key cannot be
used.
Used to set the machine to the auto power shut off mode of power
saving. [Power save] key flashes in the auto power shut off mode.
Turns ON/OFF the power of the machine.
Used in the FAX nighttime mode when the FAX is installed.
This lamp lights up when the main power switch of the machine is ON.
12
13
Note
14 15 16
1
JOB QUEUE
SPOOL
SETS / PROGRESS
STATUS
COPY
020 / 001
COPYING
COPY
020 / 000
PAPER EMPTY
BBB BBB
020 / 000
WAITING
PRIORITY
0312345678
002 / 000
WAITING
STOP/DELETE
PRINT JOB
4
No.
1
Name
Paper empty display
Job list
5
6
[] [] keys
[STOP/DELETE] key
[PRIORITY] key
[DETAIL] key
[CALL] key
SCANNER
FAX JOB
SPOOL
JOB QUEUE
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
DETAIL
DETAIL
CALL
INTERNET-FAX
Complete job
status screen
INTERNET-FAX
6 7 8
Function/ Operation
Supply paper. If the status display indicates Paper empty, the specified size paper is
empty. In this case, if paper is not supplied, the output is reserved and the job data in
standby state which can be outputted are outputted in priority. (When, however, paper is
exhausted during outputting, the priority output of another job data is not made.)
To select another paper size for outputting because the specified size paper cannot be
supplied immediately, touch the key of the job in the job list and touch 8. [DETAIL] key,
and the paper size specification can be changed.
The list of jobs reserved, during execution, or completed is displayed. When [PRINT] key
is touched with the mode select key, the display of the job status screen select key is
changed over to display the list of SPOOL. The list indicates the jog outline and the
status.
When a print job during spooling or an encrypted PDF is directly printed, the job is
displayed on the SPOOL screen. If there is a list of encrypted PDF files, touch the job
key and enter the password, and the selected job is shifted to the list of [Reserve/
Executing], and the job enters the standby state.
The job list display is switched to one of SPOOL job, JOB QUEUE job, or COMPLETE
job.
SPOOL: When an encrypted PDF is printed directly, the print job list is displayed. Can be
displayed when the print job is displayed.
JOB QUEUE: The job list which is reserved or executing is displayed.
COMPLETE: The job list which completed is displayed.
Used to select the print mode, the scanner mode, the Fax mode, or the internet FAX mode.
[PRINT JOB] key displays the list of copy, printer, Fax receive, internet Fax receive, and
the self print.
[SCANNER] key displays the send list of the scanner function.
[FAX JOB] key displays the send list of the Fax and the PC-Fax functions.
[INTERNET FAX] key displays the send list of the internet Fax and the PC-Internet Fax
function.
Selects the page of the displayed job list.
Used to stop or delete the job which is executing or to delete a selected or reserved job.
However, the FAX receive print jog and the internet Fax receive print job cannot be stopped
or deleted.
When a job is selected in the reserved jobs displayed in the job list of JOB QUEUE screen
and the key is touched, the job reservation priority is changed to the top priority.
For a print job, select a priority job and touch this key, and the previous copying or printing
is interrupted and the selected job copy or print is started. After completion of the selected
job, the interrupted job is resumed from the interrupted point.
Used to display the details of the selected job. When the automatic temporal save of the
document filing function or filing is executed, or when sequential broadcasting send is
executed with the FAX/image send function, the key display is made in the complete job
status screen. When this key is touched, the details of the completed jobs are displayed
and reprint or resend of the job can be executed by touching [CALL] key.
When the displayed key is touched on the complete job status screen and [CALL] key is
touched, the operation (reprint or resend) of the touched job is executed. Same as when
[DETAIL] key is touched and [CALL] key is touched.
9
Note
G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS
TFD2
POD2 HOPS
TFD3
POD3
APPD1
DSW_ADU
POD1
REGS_F/R
PCS_CL/K
1TUD_K
1TUD_CL
APPD2
MPFD
MPED
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
TCS_Y
TCS_M
TCS_C
MPLD
TH_M/HUD_M
PPD1
PPD2
DHPD_CL
TCS_K
DHPD_K
CPFD1
DSW_C
CPFD2
Name
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Transfer belt separation BK detection
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 2 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
ADU transport open/close detection
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close
detection
Shifter home position detection
Scanner home position sensor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Function/Operation
Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
Detects tray 1 upper limit.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
NOTE
Signal name
MPFD
MPLD
Name
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detector
Function/Operation
Detects the manual feed paper entry.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Type
Transmission type
MPWD
Volume resistor
Transmission type
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
PCS_CL/K
POD1
POD2
POD3
PPD1
PPD2
REGS_F/R
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/HUD_M
NOTE
Manual paper
feed unit
Transmission type
Manual paper
feed unit
Manual paper
feed unit
Transmission type
Reflection type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Reflection type
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Transmission type
H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
DHSW
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal name
1TNFD
DHSW
(Japan only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
Dehumidifier heater switch
Type
Mechanical switch
Seesaw switch
DSW-F
Micro switch
DSW-R
Micro switch
MSW
PWRSW
Main SW
Operation panel power switch
Seesaw switch
Push switch
Function/Operation
Detects the waste toner full.
Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the dehumidifier heaters
provided in the scanner (reading) section and the paper
feed section.
Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
Note
1TURC
MPGS
LSUSS1
PCSS
MPFS
MPUC
CPUC1
CPFC
CPUC2
Signal name
1TURC
Name
Primary transfer separation clutch
Type
Electromagnetic clutch
CPFC
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC1
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC2
Electromagnetic clutch
LSUSS1
MPFS
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
MPGS
MPUC
Electromagnetic clutch
PCSS
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
Function/Operation
Controls the primary transfer separation
mode.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport
roller in the paper feed tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Controls open/close of the manual paper
feed gate solenoid.
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process
control and the registration sensor.
Note
J. Drive motors
MIM
PGM
TNM_Y
OSM
POM
TNM_M
TNM_C
DVM_CL
FUM
WTNM
TNM_K
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_K
RRM
ADUM_L
PFM
CPFM
CLUM1
CLUM2
Signal name
ADUM_L
CLUM1
Type
Stepping motor
DC brush-less motor
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
DC brush-less motor
CPFM
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_CL
DVM_K
FUM
MIM
OSM
PFM
Name
ADU motor lower
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2)
Paper feed motor
Drum motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Developing drive motor (K)
Fusing drive motor
Scanner motor
Shifter motor
PS front motor
Brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Brush-less motor
Brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
PGM
POM
RRM
TNM_C
TNM_K
TNM_M
TNM_Y
WTNM
Polygon motor
Paper exit drive motor
Registration motor
Toner motor C
Toner motor K
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Waste toner drive motor
DC brushless motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
CLUM2
Note
K. Lamps
CLI
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
Signal name
CCFT
CLI
Name
LCD backlight
Scanner lamp
Type
CCFT cool cathode ray tube
Xenon lamp
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
LED
LED
LED
LED
Function/Operation
Backlight for the CCD
Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
document images.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
Note
1 : December 15 2005
HDDFM
CPUFM
PSFM
OZFM
1
Signal name
CPUFM
HDDFM
OZFM
POFM_F
POFM_R
PSFM
No.
1
2
3
Name
Controller cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Power cooling fan motor
Name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Function/Operation
Cools the controller PWB.
Cools the HDD.
Exhausts ozone.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the power unit.
Note
Function/Operation
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Note
M. PWB
DV
32
16
15
31
12
17
14
18
13
LSU
10
33
30
37
19
21
29
20
38
28
7
1
23
control box
27
26
22
11
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Name
RD I/F PWB
Tray 1 detection PWB
Tray 2 detection PWB
DC power PWB
Driver main PWB
MC PWB
Primary transfer PWB
AC power PWB
Scanner control PWB
CCD PWB
Phase detection PWB
CL inverter PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
Power SW PWB
HL PWB
Driver sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Temperature/humidity sensor PWB
Manual paper feed width detection PWB
MFPcnt PWB
Mother PWB
PCU PWB
PCU Flash ROM PWB
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
LSU thermistor
DL PWB
DV initial PWB
LD PWB
34
25
24
35
36
Function/Operation
Detects the sensors in the right door unit.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Outputs the secondary side voltage.
Drives the transport motor and related sections.
Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
Generates the primary transfer voltage.
Controls the primary side power source.
Controls the scanner section.
Scans the document images.
Adjusts the BL/CL drum phase.
Drives the xenon lamp.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
Outputs the key operation signal.
Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
Controls the heater lamp.
Drives the process motor and related sections.
Generates the secondary transfer voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
Detects the ambient temperature and humidity.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Controls images and the whole machine.
Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
Controls the engine section.
Controls the PCU PWB.
Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
Controls the LSU.
Measures the temperature in the LSU.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Detects the DV model.
Controls laser lighting.
Note
No.
34
35
36
37
38
Name
SCAN IN PWB
DOCC PWB
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
HVR PWB
Function/Operation
Rectifies the waveform of scanner image data.
Recognizes the document control pattern.
Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
Stores the program.
Stores the scanner control program.
Divides the primary transfer electrode for each color to improve the transfer capability.
Note
Option
N. Fuses/Thermostats
18
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
7
8
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Signal name
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F101
F102
F103
F301
F1
Name
Thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Specifications
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
20A 125V
20A 125V
T2AH250V
T2AH250V
200mA 250V
125V 12A
T1AH250V
T8AH250V
T5AH250V
1.25A250V
9
10
11
12
Section
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
LCD INV PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
CL invertor PWB
O. Adjustment volumes
VR402
VR205
VR204
VR201
VR203
Signal name
VR201
VR203
VR204
VR205
VR402
Function/ Operation
+12V output adjustment
+24V output adjustment
+5VN output adjustment
+3.3V output adjustment
+5VO, +5VL output adjustment
Section
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
Note
P. Gate
1
2
No.
1
2
Name
ADU reverse gate
ADU gate lower
Function/ Operation
Switches the paper route: discharged to the inner tray or
discharged to the right tray.
Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
Note
Q. Rollers
35
34
32
33
36
37
24
25
27
26
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
22
23
5
4
20
21
31
30
19
17
18
6
15
16
14
12
13
9
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Resist roller (Drive)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Function/ Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separate paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport
timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the
transport roller 4.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No.
2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Note
No.
21
Name
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function/ Operation
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
transport roller 8.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper to the resist roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport
roller 8.
Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. /
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray.
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper.
Heats toner on paper, and fuses it onto paper.
Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
Note
MX2700N
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
ADJ 5
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
ADJ 8
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 4A
ADJ 4B
ADJ 4C
ADJ 5A
ADJ 5B
ADJ 7A
ADJ 7B
ADJ 8A
ADJ 10A
ADJ 10B
ADJ 10C
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
ADJ 11A
ADJ 11B
ADJ 11C
ADJ 11D
Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
Scan image skew adjustment (RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
ADJ 14A
(Document table mode)
ADJ 14B
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (RADF
mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 15A
ADJ 15B
ADJ 16
ADJ 17
ADJ 18
ADJ 19
ADJ 20
ADJ 16A
ADJ 16B
Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
ADJ 18A
Simulation
8-2
8-1
8-6
44-13
44-2
64-1/61-4
50-22
44-31
50-10
50-10
50-22
50-20
50-21
48-1
48-1
48-1
48-1
50-12
50-12
50-10/50-1
50-1 (50-2)
50-6 (50-7)
50-5
63-3 (63-5)
46-24
46-21
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
46-27
2 : Jan. 15 2006
Job No.
ADJ 20
ADJ 21
ADJ 22
ADJ 23
ADJ 24
ADJ 25
ADJ 26
ADJ 27
Simulation
46-25
26-53
46-33
46-33
67-24
67-25
26-54
41-2
41-2
40-2
53-7
65-1
50-28
50-28
50-28
50-28
3. Details of adjustment
2)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2
1
2 3)
70mm
70mm
40mm
40mm
2 : Jan. 15 2006
4)
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
2 5)
A
37.8 + 0.5mm
37.8 + 0.5mm
70mm
40mm
70mm
6)
40mm
7)
1)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a correct position.)
4)
23mm
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
EL abnormality
EE-EU
EU abnormality
EE-EC
EC abnormality
1/2
6)
EXECUTE
a)
or process interrupt
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
xx
TCV_K
xx
TCD_C
xx
TCV_C
xx
TCD_M
xx
TCV_M
xx
TCD_Y
xx
TCV_Y
xx
b)
EXECUTE
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction may not be performed correctly.
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
4-A
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
1/1
Adjustment completed
TEST
Detail of error
Sensor output level, 1.5V or below; control
voltage, 8.0V or above
Sensor output level, 3.45V or above;
control voltage, 2.0V or below
Sensor output level, other than 2.5V 0.2V
5)
AUTOMATIC
Error name
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
Error
display
EE-EL
Abnormal
end
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
:
EE-EL
TCV_K
TCD_C
xx
TCV_C
TCD_M
EE-EL
TCV_M
TCD_Y
xx
TCV_Y
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
A:
EXECUTE
230
1/1
2)
3)
4)
When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
AND OUTPUT
xxx
850
MIDDLE
A : xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
A:
230
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
xxx
850
MIDDLE
AND OUTPUT
A : xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
3)
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
Mode
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
230 850
615
Actual
voltage
615V
230 850
615
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
615
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
615
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
605
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
605
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
605
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
605
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
GBK:XXX
GBC:XXX
GBM:XXX
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
GBY:XXX
8)
4-B
2
1
1)
0
TEST
DV
A:
AND
xxx
0
700
MIDDLE
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
SETTING
2)
OUTPUT
Axxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
0
TEST
DV
SETTING
A:
AND
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
700
MIDDLE
OUTPUT
Axxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
OK
Mode
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
0 700
450
Actual
voltage
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
2
1
DVK:XXX
DVC:XXX
DVM:XXX
DVY:XXX
1 : Dec. 15 2005
2)
3)
4)
5)
4-C
0
CNMON
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
A:
xxx
0
255
Axxx
Bxxx
Cxxx
Dxxx
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
6)
7)
8)
or after 30 sec.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
A:
xxx
0
255
Axxx
Bxxx
Cxxx
Dxxx
EXECUTE
OK
2)
PCU PWB
3)
Developing unit
OK
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Content
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
100
100
90
90
69
69
60
60
184
184
79
72
72
156
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
50V to 1500
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
12.5A
12.5A
10A
10A
6A
6A
4A
4A
30A
30A
8A
200V
200V
800V
4)
5)
Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer
belt unit.
6)
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
clean.
5-A
1)
Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
toner box.
2)
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
xxx
PCS CL DARK
xxx
xxx
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
3)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
1/1
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
xxx
PCS CL DARK
xxx
xxx
UN LOCK
EXECUTE
1/1
8)
9)
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
Content
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
Color image density sensor
dark-voltage level
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
Adjustment
value range
1 255
Default
value
108
0 255
1 255
21
5-B
1)
REGIST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL LED ADJ
B
PCS _K LED ADJ
C
PCS_CL DARK
D
PCS_K DARK
E
PCS_K GRND
F
PCS_K BELT MAX
G PCS_K BELT MIN
H
PCS_K BELT DIF
I
REG_F LED ADJ
J
REG_R LED ADJ
K
REG_F DARK
L
REG_R DARK
M REG_F GRND
N
REG_R GRND
O REG_F BELTMAX
P
REG_F BELT MIN
Q REG_F BELT DIF
R
REG_R BELT MAX
S
REG_R BELT MIN
T
REG_R BELT DIF
U
REG_F PATCH (K)
V
REG_F PATCH (C)
W REG_F PATCH (M)
X
REG_F PATCH (Y)
Y
REG_R PATCH (K)
Z
REG_R PATCH (C)
AA REG_R PATCH (M)
AB REG_R PATCH (Y)
TEST
PRO CON
xx
PCS_ GRND
xx
xx
xx
PCS_CL DARK
xx
PCS_KBELTMIN :
xx
PCS_K DARK
xx
PCS_KBELTDIF :
xx
EXECUTE
2)
1/4
Content
Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color image sensor dark voltage
Black image density sensor dark voltage
Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.)
Belt base detection level (Min.)
Belt base detection level difference (Item F Item G)
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Image registration sensor dark voltage F
Image registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.) F
Belt base detection level (Min.) F
Belt base detection level difference (Item O Item P)
Belt base detection level (Max.) R
Belt base detection level (Min.) R
Belt base detection level difference (Item R Item S)
Patch detection level F (K)
Patch detection level F (C)
Patch detection level F (M)
Patch detection level F (Y)
Patch detection level R (K)
Patch detection level R (C)
Patch detection level R (M)
Patch detection level R (Y)
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 : Jan. 15 2006
NOTE:
(Method 1)
Diagonal line D
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
TEST
A:
xxx
1
Axxx
MULTICOUNT
PAPERCS1
Diagonal line C
PRINT)
999
F
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
C D = 0.8mm
0
TEST
A:
(SELF
PRINT)
Axxx
MULTICOUNT
PAPERCS1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
(Method 2)
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
1 999
EXECUTE
OK
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
2)
3)
0.5 mm or less
Comparison line
Direction A
Direction B
Direction B
Reference line
F
The cross patterns in a row
Reference line
F
2 4)
Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
adjust.
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
2 : Jan. 15 2006
6)
Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by
5 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
*B
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Direction A
*A
Direction B
*B
F
*A: Rough adjustment pattern
*B: Fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 11
7-A
1)
7-B
1)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
C
M
Y
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
PHASE
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
REGIST
DRUM POS
0
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
A x
A:
x
1
xxx (xx)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
xxx (xx)
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
OK
10-key
EXECUTE
Normal end
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
NOW EXECUTING
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
A x
A:
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
B x
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
or end of print
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
[EXECUTE] TO
START
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
A:
EXECUTE
A x
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
ERRORTONNER EMPTY
2)
OK
10-key
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
OK
POSITION SETTING
A:
A x
PRINT MODE45
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
TEST
DRUM
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
POSITION SETTING
A:
1
1
A 1
PRINT MODE45
B 2
COLOR
C 2
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key.
3)
4)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
A:
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
64 140
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
end of print
0
TEST
PAPER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
CENTER
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
Bxx
MTF
Cxx
CS1
Dxx
CS2
64 140
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
4)
5)
Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
94mm
94mm
94mm
94mm
6)
Display/Item
C
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
I
J
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS 1
CS 2
CS 4
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
LCC
YES
Set
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 999
16 1
1
2 (CS 1)
2
3
4
5
01
6
0
1 (NO)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
5)
0
TEST
DUPLEX
Content
A:
xxx
A : xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
A:
xxx
A : xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Display/Item
BK-MAG
MFT
Content
Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment
value (Manual feed tray)
Set
range
60 140
Default
value
100
1 99
50
6)
7)
10-A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
1)
8)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
DLUM POSITION
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION &
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx(x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
REGIST
DRUM POS
PHASE
xxx (x)
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
Normal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
EXECUTING
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
[EXECUTE] TO
START
ERRORTONNER EMPTY
EXECUTE
2)
Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode.
3)
REGIST
MAIN
F
Content
C
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
Default
value
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
R
Content
C
SUB
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Yellow)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
Default
value
100
1.0 199.0
100
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
TEST
1.0 199.0
A:
100
xxx
DIRECTION
Axxx
CYAN(FRONT)
Bxxx
CYAN(REAR)
Cxxx
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dxxx
MAGENTA(REAR)
1 199
1.0 199.0
EXECUTE
100
10-key
1.0 199.0
100
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
1.0 199.0
100
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
TEST
A:
xxx
DIRECTION
Axxx
CYAN(FRONT)
Bxxx
CYAN(REAR)
Cxxx
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dxxx
MAGENTA(REAR)
1 199
OK
2)
3)
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scanning direction is printed.
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
(Example)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
20
CYAN
(FRONT)
CYAN
(REAR)
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA
(REAR)
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 199
1 199
1 199
Default
value
100
100
100
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
1 199
100
(Example)
YELLOW
(FRONT)
YELLOW
(REAR)
1 199
100
-20
1 199
100
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
Yellow
E
Magenta
C
Cyan
A
(Example)
Previous value before adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
D: 98
E: 102
F: 96
0
TEST
REGISTRATION
A:
ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING
xxx
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
DIRECTION
Axxx
CYAN
Bxxx
MAGENTA
Cxxx
YELLOW
Dxxx
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
A:
xxx
1
DIRECTION
CYAN
Bxx
MAGENTA
Cxxx
YELLOW
Dxxx
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
3)
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color.
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
print pattern check:
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
A
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)
Default
value
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
Adjustment
value range
1 199
-20
20
C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.
b)
Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and
the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit.
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
L
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
L = 10mm
L
3)
La
Lb
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
Lc
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld
5)
6)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
5)
0
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
MAGNIFICATION
6)
7)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
A:
ADJUSTMENT
xx
99
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
OK
2)
3)
4)
2)
Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6)
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
100mm scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
A
8)
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
13 Scan
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
OK
3)
2)
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
Scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
OK
3)
4)
5)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
20
90
100
110
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
10
5)
4)
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6)
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
2)
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
A:
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
60 140
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-12
CLOSE
A:
xx
1
0
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
OFFSET
SETUP
A xxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
xxx
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
60 140
A xx
OC
Bxx
SPF(SIDE1)
Cxx
SPF(SIDE2)
EXECUTE
99
OK
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
3)
4)
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/
Item
X
Y
Z1/Z2
6)
DENA
Content
Void are
amount
adjustment
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Z1
2.02.0mm
Lead edge
void area
adjustment
Rear edge
void area
adjustment
FRONT/
REAR void
area
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
1 99
30
3.0
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0
2.0mm
X
3.01.0mm
Y
2.01.0mm
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Z2
2.02.0mm
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
5)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
LEAD EDGE
A:
ADJUSTMENT
xx
0
99
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
Adjustment
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 99
50
LCC
1 99
50
Manual
feed
ADU
1 99
50
1 99
50
Content
Image lead
edge
position
adjustment
value
Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
Desk
VALUE
A xx
Display
item
RRCBCS12
RRCBCS34
RRCBLCC
RRCBMFT
RRCBADU
adjustment
18-A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode)
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
LEAD EDGE
A:
0
ADJUSTMENT
xx
99
VALUE
A xx
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
1)
2)
LEAD EDGE
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
0
99
VALUE
A xx
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
OK
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
LEAD EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
99
VALUE
A xx
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
OK
3)
4)
Display item
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Content
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
Resist motor ON timing
Standard cassette
adjustment
Desk
LCC
Manual feed
ADU
Lead edge image loss adjustment
Side image loss adjustment
Lead edge void area adjustment
Rear edge void area adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
5)
Adjustment range
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
0 99
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
20
30
20
20
Copy area
10mm
5mm
100%
5mm 10mm
LEAD
200%
5mm
Display/
Item
Content
Image loss
adjustment
value
SIDE
10mm
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
0 99
30
3.0
1.0mm
0 99
20
2.0
1.0mm
18-B Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1
SM.)
1)
0
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
Axxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
DEN-C
Bxxx
DEN-B
Cxxx
FRONT/REAR
Dxxx
MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
Axxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
DEN-C
Bxxx
DEN-B
Cxxx
FRONT/REAR
Dxxx
MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
A
D
E
Display/Item
DEN-C
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
Content
Printer print image lead edge adjustment
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Select
3)
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Adjustment range
1 99
1 999
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
01
0
1 (NO)
5)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
6)
Default value
30
1
2 (CS1)
3.02.0mm
Display
ADJ
5
ADJ
6
ADJ
7
ADJ
10
Image density
sensor, image
registration
sensor
adjustment
ADJ
5A
ADJ
5B
ADJ
7A
ADJ
7B
ADJ
10A
ADJ
10B
ADJ
10C
2)
Simulation
to be used
Adjustment item
3)
Adjustment/setting item
AU
AL
AO
AO
TN_COV
TN_PROCON
Allow
TN_ENV
Allow
TN_DRIP
Allow
44-2
50-22
44-31
50-22
HV
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
Set range
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
TN_SPEND
PHT
Allow
Inhibit
50-20
AR_AUTO
50-21
AR_ERROR
Allow
DM_PHASE
Allow
SENSITIVITY
Inhibit
PRT_HT
Allow
Default value
50
50
500
500
Content
Allow
64-1/61-4
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Default
value
Allow
44-13
Set range
TN_LIFE
Job
No
Content
Default
value
Allow
Job No
Allow
Allow
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 4
Allow
Allow
ADJ 12
Inhibit
Adjustment item
Simulation
to be used
8-2
8-1
8-6
Allow
Inhibit
Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
procedures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1)
Allow
Allow
2)
3)
4)
Work item
Simulation
24-7
After
replacing
OPC drum
After
replacing
developer
drum
After
replacing
transfer belt
When in
After
After cleaning
install/repair/check
replacement
scanner
(without replacing
of the image
(reading)
consumable parts)
section
density sensor
24-5
ADJ 5A
44-13
ADJ 7
50-22 (44-31)
ADJ 6
64-1/61-4
ADJ 10
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
Yes
No
Yes
No
3
Can the
copy color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Yes
No
No
Are the
color balance
and density at the
satisfactory
levels?
Yes
1
*2
The number of times
is limited to 3 times
No
Were all
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Were the
copy color balance and
density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
Yes
No
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
No
*2
The number of
times is limited to
3 times
Yes
Are the
copy color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
No
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to execute the following jobs.
(Method)
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.
2)
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
1)
10
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
NOTE:
10
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
(Color copy)
SCANNER COLOR
BALANCE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#19:
#20:
5,
4, #22: 2,
#:24: 2
OC
1/4
NOTE:
The densities of patches 1 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
2)
3)
2)
4)
0
TEST
2)
3)
4)
CLOSE
SERVICE
EXECUTE
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
1)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
color balance when shipping.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
EXECUTE
5)
High density
CLOSE
TEST
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
Max O
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes.
PROCEDURE.
6)
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
THIS
QUIT
CLOSE
PLEASE
(Method 3)
THIS
COMPLETED
OK
REPEAT
TEST
Low density
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
MODE.
(Method 1)
7)
Fig. 1 PG image
High density
Low density
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
C
Bk
EXECUTE
Max O
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
(Method 2)
EXECUTE
1/1
0
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
2)
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
1)
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#5: ERR
4)
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
5)
EXECUTE
1/1
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
9)
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
A:
245 755
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
POINT1
B : xxx
POINT2
C : xxx
POINT3
D : xxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
TEST
A:
BALANCE
xxx
245 755
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
ENGINE COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
POINT1
B : xxx
POINT2
C : xxx
POINT3
D : xxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
a. General
Low density
M
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
HALF
7)
VALUE
REGISTER
EXECUTE
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual)
to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance/density check.)
STANDARD
RESULT
6)
PROCON
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
TONE
RESULT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
EXECUTE
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
HALF
TONE
TOUCH
[EXECUTE]
THEN
EXECUTION
REGISTER
START.
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
0
EXECUTE
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
COMPLETE
RESULT
0
HALF
TONE
PROCON
STANDARD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
VALUE
REGISTER
RESULT
HALF
COMPLETE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
RESULT
EXECUTE
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
EXECUTE
9)
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the specified range.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
Kind
Factory
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Service
color
balance
(gamma)
target
User
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each
of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The
default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to customize
the color balance to users desired level. In advance, the
users unique color balance must be registered as the
service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman
with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM
63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes
the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users color
balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM
63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory
color balance target set with SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is
same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color
balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance
to the factory color balance target.
Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma)
target
When the service color balance target is changed, this
color balance target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory setting
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
+a*
Direction
of Red
Direction
of Green
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Default
Direction of Blue
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1)
2)
0
SCANNER
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
OF
#C
2944,
#H:
54344,
#M: 195950,
COLOR
CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#D:
3227,
#E:
5822,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#F:
8600
#K: 151198
1/1
SETUP
3)
4)
1)
0
STANDARD
SCANNER
SET
CLOSE
SCANNER
THE
TARGET
OF
PRINTER
CHART
ON
PLATEN
ARE
TARGET
YOU
SETTING:SERVICE
YES
SURE?
2)
3)
NO
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
COLOR
AND
CALIB
TOUCH
SETUPSERVICE
[EXECUTE].
1)
EXECUTE
0
EXPOSURE
A:
xx
1
99
AUTO
B xx
TEXT
C xx
D xx
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
SCANNER
NOW
A xx
CLOSE
TEST
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
TEST
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6308
TEST
TARGET
CHART
OF
PATCH
PRINTER
COLOR
CALIB
SETUPSERVICE
READING...
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
xx
1
CLOSE
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
99
A xx
AUTO
B xx
TEXT
C xx
D xx
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
2)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Q
R
S
T
U
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Adjustment
value range
1 99
1 99
1 99
1)
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Light document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
1 99
50
1 99
50
0
TEST
CLOSE
E
SIMULATION NO.46-02
EXPOSURE
A:
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
xx
1
99
A xx
AUTO1
B xx
AUTO2
C xx
TEXT
D xx
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
Text/Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 99
50
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph (Color
tone enhancement)
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
1 99
50
50
1 99
50
E
F
G
H
I
1 99
50
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
xx
1 99
A xx
AUTO1
B xx
AUTO2
C xx
TEXT
D xx
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
20-E Copy density adjustment (each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.
2)
Default
value
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Test/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
1 99
50
1 99
50
K
L
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
Auto 1
Auto 2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not
required)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
1/1
TEXT
CLOSE
TEST
A:
xxx
245
755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
OK
10-key
OK
1)
0
TEST
CLOSE
A:
xxx
245
755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
TEST
ENGINE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
A:
OK
EXECUTE
or end of print
COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
373 627
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS]
key
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
POINT1
Bxxx
POINT2
Cxxx
POINT3
Dxxx
POINT4
10-key
CLOSE
MANUAL
Axxx
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
OK
EXECUTE
A:
xxx
245 755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK
TEST
2)
3)
ENGINE
4)
A:
COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
373 627
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
Axxx
POINT1
Bxxx
POINT2
Cxxx
POINT3
Dxxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Adjustment
value range
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
OK
2)
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a cop and check it.
3)
4)
5)
6)
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
20-I
GAMMA SETUP
A xx
B xx
C xx
D xx
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
OK
10-key
OK
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
GAMMA SETUP
A xx
BLACK
TEXT
(SLOPE)
B xx
BLACK
TEXT
(INTERCEPTE)
C xx
D xx
a. Adjustment procedures
1)
OK
TEST
2)
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
B
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
Black text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Black text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Color text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Color text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Adjustment
range
1 99
SINGLE COLOR
A:
Default
value
50
1 99
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
COLOR
BALANCE
Ax x x
RED
Bxxx
GREEN
Cxxx
BLUE
Dxxx
YELLOW
SETUP
OK
50
10-key
1 99
50
1 99
50
OK
0
TEST
1 99
50
SINGLE COLOR
A:
1 99
50
K
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
COLOR
BALANCE
Axxx
RED
Bxxx
GREEN
Cxxx
BLUE
Dxxx
YELLOW
SETUP
2)
3)
OK
4)
Adjustment
value
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
2)
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
5)
6)
7)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
2)
3)
4)
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
Black
Yellow
Red
Blue
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A x
A:
COLOR
6)
CALIBRATION
(1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
OK
10-key
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A x
A:
COLOR
CALIBRATION
(1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
OK
1)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
TEST
A:
x
1
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
2)
3)
COLOR
AE
Content
SW_
MODE1
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE2
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE3
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE4
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE5
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE6
ON
OFF
G SW_
MODE7
ON
OFF
TH_MAX_
MONO
TH_MAX_
COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_
SCR1
SW_MODE_
SCR2
M SW_MODE_
MIX
SW_HOSEI
TH_MODE_
SCR
TH_SITAJI_
SCR
EXECUTE
Display/Item
OK
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
Adjustment
range
Default
value
01
01
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
01
01
01
01
01
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
0 32
15
Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
Increase the set value.
0 32
15
01
13
01
12
08
(4 +4)
0 10000
4
3000
0 10000
3000
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
TEST
A:
x
1
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
3)
Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a monochrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
color auto copy mode.
When a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the set value.
When a color document is not recognized as a color document, decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment reference value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
About 3mm x
4mm
(7000 pixel)
Area level 1
About 1mm x
3mm
(1875 pixel)
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set
optionally.
(30000 pixel or
more)
Large color
area
Hue level
(ACS/P/SIM
LEVEL)
Small color
area
About
10mm 5mm
(30000 pixel)
About
5mm 5mm
(15000 pixel)
About
3mm 4mm
(7000 pixel)
Hue
level 5
Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
Hue
level 1
12345
[Color]
XB
About
1mm 3mm
(1875 pixel)
XA
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Strong
hue
Weak hue
Hue
level 5
Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
Hue
level 1
START
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/
density. (Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5.)
No
Yes
3
Can the
printer color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
No
Yes
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Yes
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black.
No
Are
the color
balance and density at
the satisfactory
levels?
Yes
No
No
Were
all the three kinds
of color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Yes
No
Change the color balance/
density adjustment factory
targets. (SIM 67-26)
Were the
printer color balance
and density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Yes
No
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
No
Are the
printer color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the printer
color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the SERVICE mode.
: Standard adjustment flow
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
2)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
1)
2)
3)
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Fig. 1 PG image
Low density
High density
1)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
Bk
Max O
EXECUTE
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
2)
3)
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER CALIBRATION
OK
REPEAT
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
0
4)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
6)
QUIT
THIS
MODE.
Fig. 1 PG image
,
High density
SERVICE
Low density
EXECUTE
M
C
Bk
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Max O
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
(Method 2)
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
High density
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
Low density
Y
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
C
Bk
EXECUTE
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#5: ERR
(Method 3)
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
and the print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
21C).
Cancel SIM 67-25.
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
7)
1/1
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
9)
EXECUTE
1/1
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed out.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
1)
2)
3)
4)
EXECUTE
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 53
c. Adjustment procedure
1)
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
999). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
6)
EXECUTE
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
OK
7)
EXECUTE
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
0
TEST
CLOSE
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
8)
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
EXECUTE
OK
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
2)
3)
High density
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Low density
EXECUTE
Y
M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
EXECUTE
1/1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#5: ERR
9)
[S_VALUE]
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
EXECUTE
1/1
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
Kind
Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
Service color
balance (gamma)
target
User color
balance (gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired
level. In advance, the users unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Factory setting
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
SIM67-28
Hue
Direction of Green
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Default
Direction of Blue
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-28).
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
6)
0
SCANNER
#B:
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
SCANNER
TARGET
91,
28935,
OF
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#E:
5822,
#J: 122678,
#F:
#M: 195950,
#N: 201249,
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target
data.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
CHART
PATCH
#E:
1249,
#J: 128495,
#N: 194377,
#:O: 197276
#F:
2074
#K: 165225
REPEAT
OK
CALIB
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-28
1/1
SETUP
COLOR
908,
76117,
PRINTER
#I:
#:O: 207112
OF
#M: 189254,
#D:
TARGET
624,
18951,
8600
TEST
SETUPSERVICE
#K: 151198
4)
SCANNER
CALIB
SETUPSERVICE
3)
5)
#C
#H:
TEST
#L: 169731,
PRINTER COLOR
OF
2)
3298,
#L: 184155,
227,
#G:
TARGET
BASE:8800
Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
b. Setting procedure
SETUPSERVICE
ARE
YOU SURE?
2)
3)
YES
NO
EXECUTE
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
READING...
EXECUTE
1 : Dec. 15 2005
ment
b. Setting procedure
1)
0
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
COLOR
1)
2)
A x
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-54
(1:YES 0:NO)
OK
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
Black
Yellow
Red
Blue
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-01
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1/1
1/1
6)
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
32 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
2)
3)
32+
-0.5mm
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
P1(A4)POSITION
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed
Adjustment
failed
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO- SENSOR
LEVEL
IS
ADJUSTED.
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
PHOTO-SENSOR
ERROR
TEST
SETUP
SIMULATION NO.40-02
CLOSE
POSITION
. COMPLETE
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
2)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
3)
1)
2)
4)
5)
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
7)
8)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, image magnification ratio auto
adjustment with SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
9)
Display/Item
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
mode)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
2)
7)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
0
TEST
BK MAG
: ** |**|
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
REPRINT
1/1
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
2)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
MFT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
OK
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
1/1
1/1
3)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
LEAD
OFFSET
ALL
1/1
(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4)
0
TEST
6)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING
REPRINT
EXECUTE
1/1
5)
6)
5)
6)
7)
IMAGE
PLEASE
THEN
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
8)
SET
PRESS
POSITION
THE
SIT
ADJUSTMENT
CHART
[EXECUTE]
TO
SERVICE
PAPER
ON
THE
OC
START
REPRINT
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
1/1
2)
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CS1
ADJUSTMENT
LEAD
REPRINT
RESCAN
SERVICE
OFFSET
RETRY
SUB
DATA
OK
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
POSITION
IMAGE
OC
1/1
[7] SIMULATION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improvements in servicing.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
6)
7)
A. Basic operation
(1)
2)
3)
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
Press CA key.
NO
YES
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
NO
YES
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
NO
Operating conditions
check ?
NO
Data clear ?
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES
YES
5
1
2
3
3
10
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
6
8
9
1
Function (Purpose)
Section
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the scanning (read)
section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit.
Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the
control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic
document feeder unit and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder unit
and the control circuits.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large
capacity tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the clutches and the related circuits.
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
RSPF
Operation test/check
RSPF
Operation test/check
Finisher
Operation test/check
Finisher
Finisher
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Operation panel
Operation test/check
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Fusing
Optical (Image scanning)
Process
Paper transport section
(Transport, paper exit)
Other
Process (Transfer)
Other
Other
Fusing
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)/Transfer
Duplex
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and
control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the circuit.
Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the paper transport system, the transfer system,
the fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the related circuit.
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
Used to check printing in the color mode.
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage of each color
and the control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control
circuit.
10
13
14
15
16
1
-----
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the control
circuits.
Used to check the operations of the toner motor and the related circuit.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
17
--
21
22
1
1
5
6
8
9
Purpose
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Setting
Setting
Operation display
Operation test/check
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Duplex
Operation test/check
Process (Developing)
FAX
LCC
MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB
/ SCU PWB
Communication unit (RIC/
MODEM)
Operation test/check
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Code
Main Sub
22
10
11
12
13
19
90
23
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when replacing developer.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
25
26
3
5
6
10
18
30
35
38
41
49
50
52
53
54
65
67
69
27
Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each
position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit,
toner cartridge).
Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan mode and the
internet FAX mode.
Used to output the various set data lists.
9
10
15
30
31
1
Section
Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to
repair.)
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed
section.
Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit
and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear
the counter.)
Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to clear the counters related to the image send.
Used to initialize the administrator password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
80
24
Function (Purpose)
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
FAX
RSPF
Scanner
Operation test/Check
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Process (Developing
section)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Paper exit
Paper feed
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Clear
Operation test/Check
Auditor
Setting
Setting
Setting
Other
Printer
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Process
Setting
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Operation test/Check
Code
Main Sub
27
2
Used to set the FSS functions (initializing, call, toner order auto send).
Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the threshold value for determining
whether the gain adjustment retry number is recorded or not.
Used to clear the trouble prediction history information.
11
12
13
14
1
2
33
40
2
7
41
1
2
3
43
1
4
20
21
22
23
24
44
Used to set the FSS function (Password, HOST server TEL number).
10
30
Function (Purpose)
1
2
4
6
9
12
13
14
16
21
Used to display the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain
adjustment retry number history. (for RSPF)
Used to display the high-density, half-tone process control error history and the
automatic register adjustment error history.
Used to display the history of paper feed time between sensors.
The FSS connection test mode setting is made.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed
section, the paper transport section, and the paper exit section.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed
section and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the related circuits.
(The card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.)
(Japan only)
Used to adjust the detection level of the manual feed tray paper width detector.
Used to set the adjustment value of the detection level of the manual paper feed
tray paper width detector.
Used to display the operating state of the document sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor.
Used to display the document sensor detection level (A/D) in real time and to
display the threshold value adjusted with SIM 41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor
name.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. (Continued from 4301.)
Used to correct the environments of low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for
the fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper (SIM 43-0).
Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H)
environment for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-01) for each paper.
Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to perform H/H (high temperature, high humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to enter the correction values for SIM 43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature
corrections.
Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process)
section are enabled or not.
Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and
the registration sensor (two for resist are adjusted simultaneously) and the
surface scan.
Used to perform the correction operation of the image forming section and to set
the process control sensor adjustment conditions.
Used to forcibly execute the correction in the image process section (highdensity process correction) (process correction).
Used to check the data related to the result of the image forming section
correction (high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid
voltage in each print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.) (This simulation is
used to check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image forming
section correction (high density process correction). (This simulation is used to
check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Color image density sensor adjustment (Adjustment by the jig)
Used to check the output level of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor.
Used to check data related to the toner density correction result. (This
simulation allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.)
Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone
correction).
Section
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Process
Purpose
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data clear
Paper feed
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Operation test/Check
Other
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Paper feed
Adjustment
Setting
Other
Other
Other
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Fusing
Fusing
Setting
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Setting
Process
Adjustment
Process
Setting
Process
Operation test/Check
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process (Developing)
Process
Code
Main Sub
44
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
43
52
54
56
57
46
1
2
4
5
8
9
10
16
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
47
1
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone
image forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used
to check that the correction is normally executed or not.)
(This simulation is not used in the market.)
Used to display the process control result.
Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
Used to clear the half tone process control correction value.
Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process control execution.
Enable/disable of the half tone correction during each job is switched.
Used to perform the phase adjustment for OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust
the phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
Used to display each developing unit installing state AD value.
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of
developing unit installation not only as the judgment result (trouble display) but
also as the current state value.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half
tone correction. (The simulation is used to check whether the correction is
normally executed or not.)
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 pixel half tone correction.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel half tone correction.
Used to set the default exposure (color copy) for every document mode.
Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK copy.
Used to adjust the exposure of the color scanner.
Used to adjust the exposure of the black scanner.
Used to make the scanner color balance RGB adjustment (for color push
scanner mode).
Used to adjust the exposure.
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG
print.
Used to set the BLACK auto exposure mode.
Used to perform the copy color balance manual correction. [Color, All modes]:
PG print
Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half tone highest density correction.
Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment.
Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
Used to set the engine gamma calculating formula coefficient.
(Information on this simulation may be requested in some cases. However, this
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number
recognition (Color mode). If the local memory size is less than 256MB, the
operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
Used to execute the color auto mode adjustment.
Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-color (Red, Black) copy.
Used to perform the BLACK image forming adjustment.
Used to execute the image send sharpness adjustment. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure level adjustment and the individual setting
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to set the JPEG compression rate in Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN).
Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system (for RSPF).
Section
Purpose
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Data clear
Setting
Setting
Adjustment
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process (OPC drum)
Process (Developing)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process
Data clear
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
Engine
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
Engine
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
FAX
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
FAX
Adjustment
RSPF/Scanner
Setting
Adjustment
Code
Main Sub
48
5
49
50
6
1
3
1
5
6
10
12
20
21
22
24
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
51
1
2
53
55
6
7
8
1
2
3
Function (Purpose)
This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a
different copy magnification ratio is specified and copying is made after
adjustment of the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio with SIM 481.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the
adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the
adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted. This is the magnification ratio
adjustment in the scan system.
Used to adjust the rotating speed of each motor.
Used to execute the firmware update.
The Operation Manual saved in the hard disk is updated.
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-05 and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document table mode))
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
Used to set the lead edge adjustment value which affects only the printer print.
Used to adjust the copy image position on the print paper in the copy mode and
to adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed
with SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-6 (Simple type).) (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the print off-center for each tray.
Image print center position adjustment (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
Used to execute the scan image off-center position adjustment. (Adjusted for
each scan mode.)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the main scanning direction
registration (color shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the sub scanning registration (color
shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the auto adjustment of the main/sub scan the main/sub
registration. (Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality
image position
Used to display the data acquired with the auto registration adjustment
simulation (SIM50-22).
Used to adjust the image loss of scanned image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Used to execute the service adjustment, the OC adjustment, the BK main scan
magnification ration correction, the RSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
Used to adjust the OC document lead edge, off-center, and the sub scan
magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (1:
OC adjustment))
Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (2: BK-main scan magnification ratio
correction))
Used to execute the RSPF (Front/Back) document lead edge, off-center, and
sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (3: RSPF adjustment))
Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print offcenter (individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (4: Print position
adjustment)
Used to display the adjustment result.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (5: result display)
Used to display the data used for the adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (6: data display))
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage and the separation
bias voltage.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the registration roller (main
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed) on each section.
(When there are much variations in print image positions for paper or when the
paper jam occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to change the deflection
quantity correction value of each specified cassette.
Used to adjust the RSPF document tray size of the main unit.
Used to enter the adjustment value of the main unit RSPF document tray size
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual input (for RSPF).
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position.
Used to set the engine soft SW.
Used to set the scanner soft SW
Used to set the controller soft SW.
Section
RSPF/Scanner
Purpose
Adjustment
Adjustment
Version-up
Version-up
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
FAX/Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Process
Adjustment
Paper transport
Adjustment
RSPF
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
PCU
Scanner
MFP
Adjustment
Setting
Setting
Setting
Code
Main Sub
56
1
2
60
61
62
2
1
4
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
63
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
64
65
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
33
Function (Purpose)
Used to execute data transfer.
Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of
EEPROM, SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to restore the data.
Used to check read/write of the expansion DIMM installed to the ICU PWB.
After completion of execution, the result of each slot is displayed on the panel.
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check ICU (memory)
operation.
Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment.
Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the partial check of the hard disk read/write.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute read/write check (all areas) of the hard disk.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk excluding the system area and operation manual
area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the job completion list. (The job log data are also deleted.)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the document filing data.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in HDD trouble.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk (operation manual area only).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to check the following values related to shading for RGB and OC. (3 x 2 =
6 kinds)
Used to execute shading forcibly.
Used to execute the gamma correction and density conversion for RGB image
data inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction 1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set
value of color correction are set by calculating from the image data.
Used to reset the gamma correction and color correction parameters of the
SCAN ASIC.
Used to scan the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern and to display
the sampling result.
Used to display and register the engine auto density adjustment scanner target
value.
Used to execute the standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value (for servicing).
Used to set the factory target color balance in the auto color balance adjustment
(SIM46-24).
Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
Used to execute self-print.
Used to execute self print (PCL).
Used to execute the printer self print (PS).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position
adjustment result.
Use to execute the printer setting of auto color calibration.
Used to set the manual correction of the printer engine color balance.
Used to set the reference scanner target value of the printer engine auto density
adjustment.
Used to display and register the scanner target value (for servicing) of the
printer engine auto density adjustment.
The scanner target value (for servicing) of the printer engine auto density
adjustment is reset to the standard value.
Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main unit calibration data and the process
control correction data to the client PC by the GDI printer.
Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Used to set YES/NO of screen color change for each object.
Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for PCL)
Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for GDI)
Section
Purpose
MFP
Memory, HDD
Data transfer
Backup
Operation test/Check
LSU
LSU
MFP (HDD)
Setting
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
Scanner (Exposure)
Scanner
Scanner (scan)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Setting
Scanner (Scanning)
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation test/Check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Printer
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation panel
Operation panel
Printer
Printer
Printer
Data clear
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
3. Details of simulation
1-5
Purpose
: Operation test/check
1-1
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Section
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
3)
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratios
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
Section
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
3)
Button
display
50
100
200
SCANNER CHECK
SCANNER CHECK
25
100
50
400
150
BLACK(SLOW)
100
50
ZOOM
100
300
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(FAST)
25
400
%
300
ZOOM
100
Default
value
100%
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-05
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-01
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
0
TEST
TEST
Content
150
BLACK(SLOW)
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
2
1-2
Purpose
2-1
: Operation test/check
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Section
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the control
circuit.
Item
: Operation
Section
: RSPF
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
3)
4)
0
TEST
SCANNER
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 1 02
SENSO R
CLOSE
CHE CK
MHPS
1/1
Operation/Procedure
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
RSPF AGING
25
100
1-SIDE
400
%
2-SIDE
50
100
BLACK(FAST)
ZOOM
300
150
200
BLACK(SLOW)
COLOR
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-01
0
TEST
1)
SPFM
SPRM_F
SPRM_R
SPFC
SRRC
SGS
STMPS
EXECUTE
2-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and the related circuits.
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
TEST
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
SIMULATION NO.0203
OUTPUT
CHECK
SPFM
SPRM_R
SRRC
STMPS
0
CLOSE
SPRM_F
SPFC
SGS
EXECUTE
3
3-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-02
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
1/1
1/1
2-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
1/1
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
FLE
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSUC
FSPD
FMLD
FFDD
FCD
FFDSW
FJSW
FSSSW
FFANLK
<Inner finisher>
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-02
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
FLE
1/2
3-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
FINRPS
FJPM
FJFM
FFM
FPM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FLM
FFC
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
0
TEST
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0303
Display
Item
STAPLE PITCH
PUNCH CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
FJFM
FFM
FPM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FLM
FFC
FINRPS
1/1
EXECUTE
1/1
Set
range
68 to 132
Default
value
100
37 to 63
50
42 to 58
50
3-10
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
FINISHER
A:
1)
ADJUSTMENT
200
0 400
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-10
TEST
A200
SADDLE POSITION
B200
FOLDING POSITION
C 10
FRONT ADJUSUT
D 10
REAR ADJUSUT
2)
3)
<Saddle finisher>
Item
Display
Item
SADDLE POSITOIN
Saddle binding
position adjustment
Saddle folding
position adjustment
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(one position at the
rear)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(one position in front)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(two positions at the
center)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(two positions in
pitch)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
FOLDING POSITION
FRONT ADJUST
REAR ADJUST
STAPLE REAR
STAPLE FRONT
STAPLE BOTH
STAPLE PITCH
PUNCH CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Set
range
0 to 400
Default
value
200
0 to 400
200
0 to 20
10
0 to 20
10
0 to 200
100
Item
Display
Item
FRONT ADJUST
REAR ADJUST
STAPLE REAR
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions at the
center)
STAPLE FRONT
STAPLE BOTH
4-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray and the related circuit.
Section
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
0 to 200
100
0 to 200
100
0 to 100
50
47 to 53
50
0 to 100
50
<Inner finisher>
OK
Set
range
2 to 18
Default
value
10
2 to 18
10
68 to 132
100
<Desk sensor>
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
68 to 132
100
68 to 132
100
LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LTOD
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.04-02
TEST
TEST
DESK/LCC
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
CLOSE
DTRC
DTRC ON
LTRC
LTRC OFF
1/1
1/1
4-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
5-1
Section
Purpose
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
: Operation test/check
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
SIMULATION NO.0403
DSK/LCC LOAD CHECK
CLOSE
TEST
DPFM
DPUC2
DLUM1
DPUC1
DLUM2
DTRC
5-2
Purpose
EXECUTE
1/1
4-5
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: Operation test/check
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
2)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch panel.
The selected clutch operation is performed.
When the operation is normally completed, the button is highlighted.
DTRC
LTRC
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0502
TEST
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
HL_ALL
6-1
Purpose
EXECUTE
1/1
5-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Section
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
TEST
: Operation test/check
Transport/
imaging
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0503
OC
COPY LAMP
EXECUTE
1/1
5-4
Purpose
Paper feed
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05-04
DL_C
DL_M
Same control
0
TEST
Transport motor
Resist motor
Paper exit motor normal rotation
Paper exit motor reverse rotation
Fusing motor
Cassette paper feed motor
Shifter motor
Waste toner drive motor
Cassette vertical transport clutch
Primary transfer separation clutch
Process control shutter solenoid
LSU shutter solenoid 1
LSU shutter solenoid 2
Cassette 1 lift-up motor
Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
Cassette 2 lift-up motor
Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual feed take-up solenoid
Manual feed gate solenoid
PFM
RRM
POMF (*)
POMR (*)
FUM
CPFM
OSM
WTNM
CPFC
1TURC
PCSS
LSUSS1
LSUSS2
CLUM1
CPUC1
CLUM2
CPUC2
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
DL_Y
EXECUTE
PFM
RRM
FUM
CPFM
1TURC
PCSS
CPUC1
CLUM2
1/1
0
CLOSE
POMF
POMR
OSM
CPFC
WTNM
CLUM1
CPUC2
MPUC
EXECUTE
1/2
6-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: Other
Item
: Operation
7-1
Purpose
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
Section
: Other
1)
Item
: Operation
2)
SIMULATION NO.0602
TEST
FAN LOAD SETUP
POFM
PSFM
0
CLOSE
OZFM
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0701
TEST
AGING TEST
SETTING
AGING
6-3
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
: Operation test/check
WARMUP DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
Purpose
Section
: Process (Transfer)
Item
: Operation
2)
0
TEST
CHECK
CCD
1/1
: Setting
: Other
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Item
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
Set range
1 to 900
Default value
3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0603
DISABLE
GAIN FREE
DISABLE
EXECUTE
Purpose
1)
DV
7-6
Operation/Procedure
BLACK
COLOR
FREE
FUSING
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-06
EXECUTE
A:
1/1
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
3
1 900
OK
7-8
Purpose
: Operation display
2)
3)
4)
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Button
Item
Display
Content
MIDDLE
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_Y
K developing
bias set value
at middle speed
C developing
bias set value
at middle speed
M developing
bias set value
at middle speed
Y developing
bias set value
at middle speed
K developing
bias set value
at low speed
C developing
bias set value
at low speed
M developing
bias set value
at low speed
Y developing
bias set value
at low speed
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0708
WARM UP TIME
DISPLAY
SETTING
0 SECONDS
D
EXECUTE
LOW
7-9
Purpose
Section
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
K
C
M
Y
TEST
DV
Setup/cancel of black
Setup/cancel of cyan
Setup/cancel of magenta
Setup/cancel of yellow
LOW SPEED
DVB_C
LOW SPEED
DVB_M
LOW SPEED
DVB_Y
SELECT(COLOR
SETTING
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
CLOSE
MIDDLE
A450
B450
C450
D450
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
CLOSE
MODE)
8-2
Purpose
EXECUTE
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Section
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
8-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Operation
2)
3)
4)
Operation/Procedure
1)
450
AND OUTPUT
0 700
SIMULATION NO.0709
COLOR
0 to 700
SIMULATION NO.0801
A:
K
Default
value
450
TEST
LOW SPEED
DVB_K
: Operation test/check
PRINTING
Setting
range
0 to 700
Button
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
Display
Content
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
SPEED
GB_K
LOW
SPEED
GB_C
LOW
SPEED
GB_M
LOW
SPEED
GB_Y
K charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Setting
range
230 to 850
Default
value
615
0
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
230 to 850
A:
615
615
230 850
230 to 850
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0802
AND
OUTPUT
A615
B615
C615
D615
615
MIDDLE
230 to 850
615
230 to 850
605
LOW
605
230 to 850
605
230 to 850
OK
8-6
Purpose
230 to 850
EXECUTE
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
605
1)
2)
3)
Item
Display
Content
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
100
100
90
90
69
69
60
60
184
184
79
72
72
156
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
50V to 1500
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
0
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
A:
[ 0~255]
232
A : 232
B : 232
C : 139
D : 139
EXECUTE
OK
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
12.5A
12.5A
10A
10A
6A
6A
4A
4A
30A
30A
8A
200V
200V
800V
10
10-1
9-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Section
Item
: Operation test/check
: Process (Developing)
: Duplex
Item
: Operation
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0902
TEST
DSW_ADU
APPD2
Toner motor K
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
0
TEST
TONER
1/1
MOTOR
ACTIVATION
TNM_K
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.10-01
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
9-3
Purpose
EXECUTE
: Operation test/check
: Duplex
Item
: Operation
13
13--
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
2)
Section
: FAX
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ADUM_L
1)
2)
0
TEST
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.09-03
TEST
U1 TROUBLE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.13
CANCELLATION
ADUM_L
EXECUTE
1/1
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
14
U2 TROUBLE
14-Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.16
TEST
CANCELLATION
Item
: Trouble
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
17
0
TEST
TRO UBLE
CLOSE
S I MU LA TI O N N O . 1 4
17-Purpose
Section
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YO U
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1)
2)
15
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.17
TEST
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
15-Purpose
: LCC
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
NO
EXECUTE
21-1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.15
LCC TROUBLE
YES
21
1)
TEST
CANCELLATION
Purpose
: Setting
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
16
16-Purpose
Item
: Trouble
1)
2)
3)
Item
Display
Content
Set range
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(TOTAL)
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(COLOR)
Maintenance
counter
(total)
Maintenance
counter
(color)
0: DEFAULT,
1 300: 1K 300K
999: FREE
0: DEFAULT,
1 300: 1K 300K
999: FREE
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Default
value
100K
60K
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.21-01
A: 0
B: 0
TOTAL OUT(BW)
: 00000000
[ 1~300]
OK
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
COPY(BW)
: 00000000
TOTAL(BW)
: 00000000
COPY(COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(COL)
: 00000000
COPY(2COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(2COL)
: 00000000
COPY(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
Purpose
22-1
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Item
: Counter
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
1/3
22-2
22
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-01
COUNTER DISPLAY
TEST
MACHINE JAM
RSPF/DSPF JAM
TROUBLE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-02
: 00000000
: 00000000
1/1
22-3
Purpose
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
The above histories are displayed from the newest one to the oldest in this sequence. The max. 50 items are saved. (The oldest one
is sequentially erased.)
* List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12]
OTHERS."
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-03
CPFD2_S2
MFT
TRAY3
PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
APPD3_S
DPFD2_S4
LCC
PPD2_PRI
CPID2_S2
CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1
PPD2_PRI
TRAY3
APPD3_S
TRAY2
MFT
1/1
1/1
22-4
Purpose
TEST
S/N : **********
ICU(MAIN)
: 00.00.00
ICU(BOOT)
: 00.00.00
PCU
: Trouble
LANGUAGE
: 00.00.00
SCU
: 00.00.00
GRAPHIC
: 00.00.00
SPF
: NONE
: 00.00.00
FAX1(MAIN)
: NONE
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed.
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 30 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted
sequentially.)
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
* Trouble code list: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in the "[8] SELF
DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-05
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-04
Purpose
Item
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
F9-20
F2-39
L4-31
F1-50
L4-02
F2-39
F1-50
F1-50
L4-02
F1-61
F1-50
F1-50
F2-39
H5-01
E7-23
1)
U5-12
F2-39
L1-00
E7-23
2)
1/2
22-5
: Others
Item
: Software
1/2
22-6
E7-23
Purpose
: 00.00.00
Item
A
Operation/Procedure
Description
Data pattern selection
1: List print
2: List print (Sim50-24)
Set
range
1 to 2
Default
value
1
0
TEST
A: 1
A:
S/N
ICU(MAIN)
ICU(BOOT)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
IMG DATA ROM
COLOR PROFILE
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2(MAIN)
DESK
LCC
FINISHER
SADDLE
PUNCH
NIC
POWER-CON
E-MANUAL
Serial No.
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
ImageASIC FlashROM data
Color profile
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX1 line (Main section)
FAX2 line (Main section)
Desk unit
Side LCC
Finisher
Saddle unit
Punch unit
NIC
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-06
; DATA PATTERN
[ 1~ 2 ]
EXECUTE
OK
22-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Section
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the finisher counter, the RSPF counter, and the scanner (read) related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
RSPF/DSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC_OPEN
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP_TIME
0
TEST
Item display
PUNCHER
Display content
MX-PNX1A
MX-PNX1B
AR-PN1A
AR-PN1B
MX-FNX1
MX-FNX2
MX-FXX1
MX-FLX1
AR-MM9
MX-MMX1
MX-HNX1
MX-NSX1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-08
00000000
SADDLE STAPLER :
00000000
SCAN
00000000
OC OPEN
00000000
STAPLER
00000000
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN :
00000000
OC LAMP TIME
00000:00
PUNCHER
00000000
STAMP
00000000
FINISHER
FAX1
FAX2
FAX MEMORY
22-9
Purpose
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
HAND SET
NETWORK
SCANNER
PRINTER
PS
SECURITY
AIM
SDRAM(SYS)
SDRAM(ICU)
HDD
NIC
BARCODE
INTERNET-FAX
MX-PBX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FRX1
MX-AMX1
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
STANDARD
AR-PF1
MX-FWX1
Content
Punch unit
Finisher
FAX kit
FAX2 line kit
FAX expansion memory
Handset
Network scanner expansion kit
Printer expansion kit
PS expansion kit
Security kit
Application expansion kit
SDRAM capacity
SDRAM capacity
Hard disk capacity
NIC
Barcode font
Internet Fax expansion kit
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-10
MACHINE SYSTEM
MACHINE
MX-2300G
PUNCHER
MX-PNX1A
RSPF/DSPF
MX-RPX1/STANDARD
FINISHER
MX-FNX1
STAMP
AR-SU1
FAX
MX-FNX1
DESK
MX-DEX1
FAX2
MX-FLX1
LCC
MX-LCX1
FAX MEMORY
AR-MM9
1/ 3
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-09
00000000
MFT HEAVY
TRAY2
00000000
MFT OHP
00000000
TRAY3
00000000
MFT ENV
00000000
TRAY4
00000000
LCC
00000000
MFT TOTAL
00000000
ADU
00000000
22-11
Purpose
00000000
Section
: FAX
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
22-10
Purpose
Item
: Specifications (Option)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Item display
MACHINE
RSPF/DSPF
STAMP
DESK
LCC
Display content
MX-2300G
MX-2300FG
MX-2700G
MX-2700FG
MX-2300N
MX-2700N
MX-RPX1/
STANDARD
AR-SU1
MX-DEX1
MX-DEX2
MX-LCX1
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
Content
Machine
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2211
00000000
FAX SEND
00000000
Finisher stamp
Desk unit
SEND IMAGES
00000000
SEND IMAGES_L2
00000000
SEND TIME
00000000:00:00
RECEIVED TIME
00000000:00:00
ACR SEND
00000000
1/1
22-12
Purpose
: RSPF
Item
: Function
TONER MOTOR M
TONER MOTOR Y
TONER TURN K
TONER TURN C
TONER TURN M
TONER TURN Y
TEST
PROCESS
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2213
CARTRIDGE
DISPLAY
DRUM CTRG K
00000000
DRUM RANGE K
00000000
DRUM CTRG C
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE C
00000000
DRUM CTRG M
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE M
00000000
DRUM CTRG Y
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE Y
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2212
52(,#/*+5614;#&+52.#;
1/2
22-19
Purpose
00000000
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
22-13
Purpose
Item
: Counter
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
DRUM RANGE C
DRUM RANGE M
DRUM RANGE Y
DEVE CTRG K
DEVE CTRG C
DEVE CTRG M
DEVE CTRG Y
DEVE RANGE K
DEVE RANGE C
DEVE RANGE M
DEVE RANGE Y
TONER MOTOR K
TONER MOTOR C
Operation/Procedure
DRUM CTRG K
DRUM CTRG C
DRUM CTRG M
DRUM CTRG Y
DRUM RANGE K
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2219
NETWORK SCANNER
COUNTER
DISPLAY
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
1/4
22-90
Purpose
Item
: Function
23
23-2
Purpose
Select the print target with the buttons on the touch panel.
Section
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Address registration
list
Document filing
folder list
System setting list
Receive rejection
number table
Receive rejection/
allow address/
domain table
Transfer to Email
table list
Transfer to
Administrator list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
ALL CUSTOM
SETTING LIST
PCL SYMBOL SET
LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT
LIST
PCL EXTENDED
FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT
LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING
ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING
FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR
SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX
NUMBER LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/
DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING
LIST
DOCUMENT ADMIN
LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
TEST
PRESS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-02
JAM/TROUBLE
DATA PRINT
MODE
[EXECUTE] TO PRINT
THE
JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
EXECUTE
23-80
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Section
Item
: Function
Operation/Procedure
Copy
Printer
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
FAX/Image send
Document filing
0
TEST
Security
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-80
DATA PRINT
Common
MODEPAPER FEED
CL
CLOSE
LIST PRINT
SIMULATION NO.22-90
PS FONT LIST
0
TES
TEST
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
24
24-1
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.)
Section
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
1/1
1/4
2)
3)
MACHINE
RSPF
TROUBLE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2401
JAM/TROUBLE
COUNTER
MACHINE
DATA CLEAR
RSPF
TROUBLE
RSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC OPEN
RSPF OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
SPF counter
Scan counter
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
OC open/close counter
OPEN RSPF open/close counter
OC section lamp total lighting time
0
TEST
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-03
24-2
STAPLER
SCAN
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC OPEN
PUNCHER
RSPF/DSPF OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
Item
: Counter
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-4
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
: Data clear
2)
3)
Section
Item
: Counter
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2402
TRAY2
MFT TOTAL
LCC
TRAY3
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
YOU SURE?
3)
TRAY4
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY
TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
MFT ENV
ADU
ARE
2)
0
TEST
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
0
24-3
Purpose
TEST
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
Section
Item
: Counter
1)
MAINTENANCE ALL
ARE
TC2 BELT
3)
TC1 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
YOU SURE?
2)
CLEAR
MAINTENANCE COL
FUSER UNIT
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2404
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-5
24-7
Purpose
: Data clear
Purpose
: Data clear
Section
Section
Item
: Counter
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
C
M
Y
C
M
Y
0
TEST
DEVELOPER COUNTER
K
YOU SURE?
YES
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2407
TEST
DATA CLEAR
C
ARE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2405
NO
K
EXECUTE
ARE
1/1
24-6
C
YOU
M
SURE?
YES
NO
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
24-9
Purpose
: Data clear
Purpose
: Data clear
Section
Item
: Counter
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Counter
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
2)
3)
COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2COLOR
1)
PRINT BW
PRINT COL
OTHER BW
OTHER COL
0
TEST
COPY COUNTER
COPY BW
DATA CLEAR
COPY COL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2406
TEST
SINGLE COLOR
COLOR
PRINT/OTHER
COUNTER
PRINT BW
YES
NO
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2409
CLEAR
OTHER BW
PRINT COL
OTHER COL
1/1
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-10
Purpose
: Data clear
Item
: Counter
0
NETWORK
SCANNER
COUTNER
3)
ARE YOU
DATA CLEAR
2)
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2415
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
SURE?
NO
EXECUTE
1/3
24-30
Purpose
: Data clear
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2410
1)
2)
FAX OUTPUT_L2
SEND IMAGES_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
0
ADMIN
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION
NO.24-30
TEST
ACR SEND
PASSWORD
INITIALIZE
1/1
24-15
Purpose
ARE
: Data clear
Item
: Counter
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
24-31
Purpose
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
Item
: Clear
2)
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
TEST
SERVICE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-31
PASSWORD INITIALIZE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Display items
25
25-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
Automatic developer
adjustment control voltage
at low speed
Automatic developer
adjustment control voltage
at middle speed
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
128
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-01
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
TEST
0
TEST
Display
range
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
Item descriptions
1/2
TCV_
TCD_C
TCV_C
TCD_M
TCV_M
TCD_Y
TCV_
LOW
MIDDLE
26
26-1
EXECUTE
1/1
Purpose
: Setting
: Setting
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Adjustment
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
1)
2)
Display
Content
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
1 (NO)
The toner concentration sensor makes sampling of toner concentration to display the detection level.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
: Paper exit
Item
Item
Operation/Procedure
Display items
Section
Display
range
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
TEST
ESCAPE TRAY
SETUP
A 0
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2601
(0:YES
1:NO)
0
0
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
OK
26-2
Item
Purpose
: Setting
: Paper feed
Item
: Setting
COUNTUP
TIMING1
Button
display
FUSER_IN
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT
Operation/Procedure
Select the paper size with the buttons on the touch panel.
LCC
0
1
Diagnosis
setting
0
TEST
SIZE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-02
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
SETUP
LCC
8.5
B5
A4
11
Default
EXIT_OUT
Content
The charging timing is when
passing the sensor paper lead
edge after fusing.
The charging timing is when
passing the sensor paper rear
edge after fusing.
The charging timing is when
passing the (machine, right)
tray/after-process unit paper
exit sensor paper rear edge.
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
Remainder
of money
left.
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
COLOR
(Remainder
of money
left)
Condition 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 3
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 2
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
No
remainder
of money.
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1: Wait for auto clear setting time. Default, 60sec. Can
be changed by the system setting.
1/1
26-3
Purpose
: Setting
: Auditor
AUDITOR
: Specifications
BUILT-IN AUDITOR
P10
OUTSIDE AUDITOR
NONE
Operation/Procedure
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
When a button is pressed, the set content is saved.
Item
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
Button
display
P10
EC1
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
NONE
P VENDOR1
P OTHER
DOC ADJ
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR
MODE (*)
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Content
Default
P10
SETUP
EC1
P VENDOR1
DOC ADJ
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR MODE
MODE1
MODE2
P OTHER
MODE3
1/2
26-5
Purpose
NONE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-03
TEST
: Setting
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
OFF
1)
2)
3)
OFF
MODE3
Item
Display
A
B
C
TOTAL (B/W)
TOTAL (COL)
MAINTENANCE
(B/W)
MAINTENANCE
(COL)
DEV (B/W)
DEV (COL)
* 1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 29
Content
Total counter (BLACK)
Total counter (COLOR)
Maintenance counter
(BLACK)
Maintenance counter
(COLOR)
Developer counter
(BLACK)
Developer counter
(COLOR)
Setting
range *
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2
Default
2
2
2
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2
0
A3(1117)
2
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-10
TEST
COUNTUP
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2605
TEST
A 2
TOTAL(B/W)
B 2
TOTAL(COL)
C 2
MAINTENANCE(B/W)
D 2
MAINTENANCE(COL)
A:1
A:
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
OK
26-6
26-18
Purpose
: Setting
Purpose
: Setting
Section
Section
Item
: Specifications (Destination)
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
2)
1)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2)
3)
DISTINATION SETUP
CANADA
U.S.A
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-06
TEST
INCH
AB_B
EUROPE
AB_A
CHINA
U.K.
JAPAN
Item
AUS
Display
Content
COPY
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
EXECUTE
1/1
B
PRINTER
(1:YES 0:NO)
26-10
0
1
Purpose
: Setting
Item
: Operation
1)
TONER
SAVE
MODE
Display
TRIAL MODE
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
SETUP
A 0
COPY(1:YES
B 0
PRINTER(1:YES
0:NO)
0:NO)
0 to 1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2618
A:
Default
value
0
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
Setting
range
0 to 1
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
OK
: Setting
Item
Display
(0:ONCE
1:ANY)
Function (Purpose) : Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control).
Section
Item
Content
0
Setting
range
0 to 1
Operation/Procedure
1)
TROUBLE
A:
MODE
SETUP
(0:ONCE
1:ANY)
0
MEMORY
A 0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-35
TEST
2)
Default
value
0
OK
Display
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
CE mark
control allowed
CE mark
control inhibited
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default value
Refer to <Initial
value and set
value linked with
the destination>.
Purpose
: Setting
: Other
Item
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Even though the control is allowed, the CE mark support
control may not be executed depending on the power frequency, etc.
<Initial value and set value linked with the destination>
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Setting value
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
1)
2)
Display
Content
MAINTENANCE
LIFE OVER
(0:CONTINUE
1:STOP)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.26-30
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Continue)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Stop)
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
CLOSE
A:
[
0~
(0:YES 1:NO)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-38
1]
A:
0
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
OK
26-35
Purpose
: Setting
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
26-41
Purpose
: Setting
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Display
Content
(0:YES
1:NO)
Center binding
mode AMS setting
Center binding
mode AMS cancel
Setting
range
0 to 1
26-50
Purpose
Default value
Refer to <Initial
value and set
value linked with
the destination>.
Section
Item
: Specifications (Operation)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Setting value
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
1 (Setting)
1 (Setting)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2)
3)
0
MODE
AMS
A:
SETTING.
A 0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-41
TEST
PAMPHLET
(0:YES
1:NO)
Item
0
0
: Setting
Display
BW
REVERSE
YES
NO
OK
Content
description
B/W REVERSE
allowed
B/W REVERSE
inhibited
Setting
range
01
01
26-49
Purpose
: Setting
COLOR MODE
2-color/Single
color inhibit
setting
0 to 7
FINISHER
FUNCTION
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is limited.
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is not limited.
01
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
YES
Set
value
LOW
HIGH
Content
Postcard copy speed LOW
Postcard copy speed HIGH
Default
value
LOW
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-49
LOW
HIGH
1/1
Default value
<Setting range
and default
value of each
set value>
Refer to
"Setting value
A."
<Setting range
and default
value of each
set value>
Refer to
"Setting value
B."
0 (YES)
01
When 2-color/
Single color inhibit
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SIM setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Setting value A
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
0 (Display inhibited)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
26-53
Setting value B
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
Purpose
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
FUNCTION SETTING
A:
1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-50
TEST
: Setting
A 1
; BW
B 0
COLOR MODE
C 0
FINISHER FUNCTION : NO
REVERSE : YES
Item
Display
Content
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
ACC YES
ACC NO
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
OK
0
26-52
Purpose
ENABLING
: Setting
Item
OF
AUTOMATIC
COLOR
A 1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
A:
CALIBRATION
(1:YES
0:NO)
1
0
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
26-54
Purpose
Display
(0:YES
1:NO)
Setting
range
0 to 1
Content
0
1
White paper
countup (YES)
White paper
coutup (NO)
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Default value
1)
2)
: Setting
Setting value
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
Display
(1:YES 0:NO)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-52
TEST
COUNT
A 1
A:
MODE
OF
AUTOMATIC
A:
Default
value
1
CLOSE
COLOR
(1:YES
0:NO)
1
0
SETUP
(0:YES
1:NO)
OK
1
0
ACC YES
ACC NO
SIMULATION NO.2654
A 1
PAPER
1
0
Setting
range
01
0
TEST
ENABLING
A BLANK
Content
OK
26-65
26-67
Purpose
: Setting
Purpose
Section
Item
: Specifications
Section
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item
LIMIT
SHEETS
LIMIT
COPIES
Content
Staple limit sheets: 30 sheets
Staple limit sheets: 50 sheets
Staple limit copies ON
Staple limit copies OFF
Setting
range
30 or 50
Default
value
30
ON or OFF
ON
2)
<LIMIT SHEETS>
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
* 25 sheets for L-size paper (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8K) regardless of setting
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.26-65
3)
4)
CLOSE
30
50
LIMIT COPIES
ON
OFF
1/1
SUMMER
TIME
Common
Item
Display
GMT +/-
B
C
D
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
INTERNET
AUTO SUMMER
TIME ADJ
YES
NO
ON
OFF
Content
GMT +/
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
Internet time YES/
NO
Auto summertime
setting ON/OFF
Adjustment time
HOUR
Adjustment time
MINUTE
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 13
0 to 59
0
1
0
1
0 to 23
Default
value
1
0 to 59
*
*
*
*
1
Remark
Category
SUMMER
TIME
Item
Display
D
E
F
G
Start time
setting
H
I
J
K
End time
setting
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Content
Start time MONTH
Start time DAY
Start time WEEK
Stat time DAY OF
THE WEEK
UTC YES/NO
End time MONTH
End time DAY
End time WEEK
End time DAY OF
THE WEEK
Setting
range
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
Default
value
*
*
*
*
0
1
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
UTC YES/NO
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Remark
When the set value is changed, it is
reflected to the START MODE.
Destination
AB_B
EUROPE
8 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
U.S.A
5 (Hour)
CANADA
5 (Hour)
INCH
5 (Hour)
JAPAN
9 (Hour)
U.K.
0 (Hour)
AUS.
10 (Hour)
AB_A
8 (Hour)
CHINA
8 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
4 (Month)
4 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
3 (Month)
3 (Month)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
Setting
value
Day of week
specifying
flag
UTC
specifying
flag
Summer time
end date
(Month)
Summer time
end date
(Day)
Summer time
end date
(Hour)
Summer time
end
Week of
summer time
end
Day of week
of summer
time end
Flag to
specify the
day of week
Flag to
specify UTC
Summer time
correction
value (Hour)
Summer time
correction
value
(minute)
Flag to
synchronize
with the
internet clock
server
U.S.A
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
CANADA
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
10
(Month)
Destination
AB_B
EUROPE
1 (Day
0 (Day of
specifying)
week
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC
ON)
INCH
1 (Day
specifying)
JAPAN
1 (Day
specifying)
U.K.
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
1 (UTC
ON)
AUS.
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
AB_A
1 (Day
specifying)
CHINA
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
10
(Month)
10
(Month)
3 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
3 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
UTC ON
UTC ON
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-67
2)
3)
A:
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
TIME ZONE
; GMT :-
A:
B:
; GMT HOUR
C:
; GMT MINUTE
D:
; INTERNET: YES
SUMMER TIME
OK
26-69
Purpose
Display
TONER
PREPARATION
(0:YES 1:NO)
TONER NEAR
END (0:YES
1:NO)
: Setting
: Process
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Toner preparation
message is displayed.
Toner preparation
message is not
displayed.
Toner near end
message is displayed.
Toner near end
message is not
displayed.
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
0 to 1
Item
Display
Content
TONER END
Operation is enabled
when TONER END.
(*1)
2 Operation is stopped
when TONER END.
(*2)
3 Operation is stopped
when TONER END.
(*3)
Used to set the number of
detection of toner end.
TONER END
COUNT
Setting
range
1 to 3
Default
value
2
: Setting
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Operation/Procedure
1 to 5
1)
2)
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key. The entered value is displayed
at "NEW."
4)
27-2
Purpose
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-69
TEST
TONER
NEAR
A:
END
SETTING
0
0
A 0
B 0
C 2
TONER END
D 3
Description
Sender registration number
HOST server TEL number
Number of digits
Max. 16 digits
Max. 16 digits
0
TEST
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-02
00000000000000000000000000000001
NEW
27
USER
FAX_NO.
SET
SERVA TEL_NO
1/1
27-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is disabled or not.
27-4
Purpose
: Setting
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Operation/Procedure
Item
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
1)
2)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
Display
DISABLE
Content
0: YES
1: NO
(U7-00) Not
detected
YES
NO
Setting
range
0 to 1 0
1
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.27-01
CLOSE
DISABLE
NO
0
0
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
3)
4)
A 0
A:
Default
value
0: Not
detected
OK
Display
FSS MODE
B
C
D
RETRY
TIMER (MINUTE)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
TONER ORDER
TIMING(M)
TONER ORDER
TIMING(Y)
Content
NEB1
NEB2
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-04
1
0~
1]
Remark
1
2
3
3 (49% to 25%)
* 0: No retry
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
: Setting
A:
Default value
27-6
0
TEST
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 15
1 to 15
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
A:
B:
RETRY
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
C:
TIMER (MINUTE)
Item
: Specifications
D:
Operation/Procedure
OK
1)
2)
: Setting
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Item
Display
Content
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
0
TEST
A:
0:YES,
1:NO
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-05
NEW :
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-06
OK
TAG# SETTING
PRESENT :
Default
value
0
Setting
range
0 to 1
11111111
SET
27-9
27-7
Purpose
Purpose
: Setting
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the
threshold value for determining whether the
gain adjustment retry number is recorded
or not.
1)
Section
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specifications
2)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
3)
4)
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
3)
4)
Display
Content
FUNCTION
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
FSS function is
enabled.
FSS function is
disabled. (*)
Alert callout is enabled.
Alert callout is disabled.
Setting
range
0 to 1
0 to 1
Default
value
1
(NO)
0
(YES)
(*): In the FSS function setting, change from Disable to Enable can
be made, but change from Disable to Enable cannot be made.
Send timing
Initial/Trouble/Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance timing detection
When Service Call key is pressed.
When toner order auto send setting reaches.
Toner installation data revision. However, only
for a new product.
Alert resend
Content
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
GAIN
ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
JAM ALERT
<Alert item>
Item
No cause of callout
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collect request
Display
Setting
range
0 to 100
Default
value
50 (%)
0 to 100
50 (%)
1 to 100
50
(TIMES)
1 to 100
10
(TIMES)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-09
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-07
A:
; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
B
ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
50
0100
A:
A 50
FEED TIME1
50
50
FEED TIME2
GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
50
JAM ALERT
OK
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
<Display item>
27-10
Purpose
: Data clear
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Item
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
SCAN GAIN ADJ1
SCAN GAIN ADJ2
SCAN GAIN ADJ3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4
SCAN GAIN ADJ5
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TROUBLE
PRECOGNITION
DATE
LSU1
Serial
communication
retry number
history display
Scanner gain
adjustment retry
history
CLOSE
RESULT
99/99/99
DESK1
99/99/99
999999
DESK2
99/99/99
999999
99999999
FINISHER1 99/99/99
999999
99999999
FINISHER2
999999
LSU2
999999
RETRY
99/99/99
99/99/99
999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
1/2
27-12
Purpose
0
TROUBLE
Content
TEST
Retry
number
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
SIMULATION NO.
TEST
Target history
Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history
Automatic register adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
Display item
Occurrence date
and time (Display)
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-10
: Process
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
27-11
Purpose
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specification
Operation/Procedure
1)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
<Display item and content descriptions>
Display item
Content
HV_ERR1
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
HV_ERR2
HV_ERR3
HV_ERR4
HV_ERR5
H_TONE ERR1
H_TONE ERR2
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
Occurrence
date and time
(Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
Error
code
(Digits)
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Display item
Occurrence
date and time
(Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
Content
H_TONE ERR3
H_TONE ERR4
H_TONE ERR5
AUTO REG
ADJ1
AUTO REG
ADJ2
AUTO REG
ADJ3
AUTO REG
ADJ4
AUTO REG
ADJ5
Automatic register
adjustment error history 1
Automatic register
adjustment error history 2
Automatic register
adjustment error history 3
Automatic register
adjustment error history 4
Automatic register
adjustment error history 5
Error
code
(Digits)
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
4 digits
27-13
Purpose
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the history of paper feed
time between sensors.
Section
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
TROUBLE
PRECOGNITION
HV
ERR1
HV
ERR2
HV
ERR3
HV
ERR4
HV
ERR5
H_TONE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.
TEST
RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
DATE
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
ERROR CODE
999999
9999
99/99/99 999999
9999
99/99/99 999999
9999
99/99/99 999999
9999
9999
Content
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
FEED TIME3
FEED TIME4
FEED TIME5
FEED TIME6
FEED TIME7
FEED TIME8
FEED TIME9
FEED TIME10
FEED TIME1(SPF)
FEED TIME2(SPF)
FEED TIME3(SPF)
FEED TIME4(SPF)
FEED TIME5(SPF)
FEED TIME6(SPF)
FEED TIME7(SPF)
FEED TIME8(SPF)
FEED TIME9(SPF)
FEED TIME10(SPF)
RSPF
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-13
Occurrence date
and time
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
Code between
sensors
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Passing time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
Passing
reference time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
27-14
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
SENSOR CODE
PASS TIME
STANDARD TIME
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
Section
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
Item
: Operation
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
Operation/Procedure
1/4
1)
2)
3)
0
TEST
Display
Content
CONNECTION
TEST MODE
(1: ON 0: OFF)
1
0
Setting
range
0 to 1
POD1
POD2
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
DSW_R
DSW_C
DSW_F
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1/1
0
(OFF)
Purpose
0
CLOSE
PPD2
POD3
30-2
SIMULATION NO.27-14
A:
PPD1
Default
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30-01
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed section and the related circuits.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
<Sensor name>
30
30-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section, the paper transport section, and the
paper exit section.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Cassette 1 transport detection
Cassette 1 upper limit detection
Cassette 1 paper empty detection
Cassette 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 1 presence detection
Cassette 2 transport detection
Cassette 2 upper limit detection
Cassette 2 paper empty detection
Cassette 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 2 presence detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detection
Manual feed tray reduction detection
Manual feed tray extension detection
Manual feed paper empty detection
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.3002
Sensor name
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Main unit paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
Shifter home detection
Right door open/close detection
Cassette 1 transport cover open/close detection
Front cover open/close detection
K phase detection
CL phase detection
Waste toner full detection
Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
Primary belt separation BK detection
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED 1
CPED 2
MPLD
CSS1
CPFD2
CLUD 2
CSPD 2
CSS2
MPFD
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPED
CSPD 1
1/1
1/1
33
Display
MAX POSITION
P1 (A4) POSITION
P2 (A4R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
33-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
: Other
Item
: Operation
Description of item
Manual feed max. width
Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Manual feed min. width
Item content
Adjustment completed
Adjustment failed
Operation/Procedure
1)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO
START
<Sensor name>
Code (Display)
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
Sensor name
Card insertion detection
Card number signal detection
Standard clock signal detection
EXECUTE
40-7
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.3301
DATA
CLOCK
: Setting
: Paper feed
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1/1
1)
1/1
40
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
40-2
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the max. width and press
[EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the
current AD value is temporality saved to RAM as the max.
width.
* During adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* After completion of the max. width adjustment, the P1 width
(A4) adjustment value start screen is displayed.
2)
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the P1 (A4) width position and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the current AD value is temporality saved to RAM
as the P1 width (A4) position. (Hereinafter, the value is saved
for each size setting.)
3)
4)
Item
Item content
A
B
MAX POSITION
P1 POSITION
P2 POSITION
MIN POSITION
Set
range
0 to 255
0 to 255
Default
value
241
231
0 to 255
140
0 to 255
19
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-07
A:
241
[ 0~ 255 ]
A : 241
MAX POSITION
B : 231
P1 POSITION
C : 140
P2 POSITION
D : 19
MIN POSITION
OK
41
41-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
: Other
Item
: Operation
Sensor name
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Content
Document sensor 1
Document sensor 2
Document sensor 3
Document sensor 4
Document sensor 5
Document sensor 6
Document sensor 7
Set range
0 255
Default value
128
Operation/Procedure
1)
TEST
<Sensor name>
Code (Display)
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Sensor name
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
EXECUTE
41-3
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4101
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
PD1
PD2
PD3
Operation/Procedure
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1)
1/1
1/1
41-2
: Operation test/Check
: Other
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Operation test/Check
OCSW
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
<Display content>
Display
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Content
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
Range
0 1 ("1": Close)
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
3)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4103
OCSW
PD5[]
PD1[]
PD6[]
PD2[]
PD7[]
PD3[]
PD4[]
1/1
43
Item
Display
HL_LM OHP
PAPER
HL_US OHP
PAPER
HL_UM ENV
PAPER
HL_LM ENV
PAPER
HL_US ENV
PAPER
HL_UM ESTAR
TH_US ESTAR
PRE-JOB
43-1
Purpose
: Setting
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Content
OHP-TH_LM set
value
OHP-TH_US set
value
Envelope TH_UM
set value
Envelope TH_LM
set value
Envelope TH_US
set value
TH_UM set value
when preheating
TH_US set value
when preheating
TH_UM set value
when resetting from
preheating
Set
range
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
30 to
200
30 to
200
30 to
200
Display
Content
HL_UM READY
HL_LM READY
HL_US READY
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
E
F
G
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T
WARM UP
END TIME
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER
HL_UM OHP
PAPER
L
M
N
O
P
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
170
180
180
145
145
180
180
145
142
130
130
160
160
0
TEST
170
Set
range
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
145
145
FUSER
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
175
180
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4301
TEMP SETUP
180
70230
FOR
PAPER
A180
HL_UM
READY
B105
HL_LM
READY
C160
HL_US
READY
D175
HL_UM
PLAIN PAPER BW
105
105
155
160
170
175
Purpose
130
130
180
180
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
OK
43-4
: Setting
170
175
30 to
200
130
130
70 to
230
180
180
30 to
200
145
145
30 to
200
75
75
30 to
255
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
76
76
170
170
140
140
175
175
170
170
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Content
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
PLAIN PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
PLAIN PAPER
CL DUP APP
CNT
BW plain paper
duplex TH_UM
set value
BW plain paper
duplex TH_LM
set value
BW plain paper
duplex TH_US
set value
BW plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_UM set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_LM set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_US set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
applicable
number of sheets
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
170
175
Set
range
Item
70 to 230
4)
100
100
70 to 230
175
180
0 to 60
70 to 230
170
175
30 to 200
100
100
70 to 230
175
180
0 to 60
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Correction value: (49 to +49) Input value: Actually entered value
(1 to 99)
Correction value
Input value
0
FUSER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-04
TEST
TEMP SETUP2
A:
170
70230
FOR
B : 100
HL_LM
PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
C : 175
HL_US
PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
D:
PLAIN
PAPER
BW
DUP APP
43-20
: Setting
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
0
50
Display item
Item content
HL_UM READY
LL
HL_LM READY
LL
HL_US READY
LL
HL_UM PLAIN
BW LL
HL_LM PLAIN
BW LL
HL_US PLAIN
BW LL
HL_UM PLAIN
CL LL
HL_LM PLAIN
CL LL
HL_US PLAIN
CL LL
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T LL
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T LL
WARMUP END
TIME LL
HL_UM HEAVY
LL
HL_LM HEAVY
LL
CNT
OK
Purpose
5
45
Item
PAPER
A : 170
25
25
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
49
1
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
80
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
Item
Display item
Item content
HL_US HEAVY
LL
HL_UMOHP LL
HL_LM OHP LL
HL_US OHP LL
HL_UM
ENVELOPE LL
HL_LM
ENVELOPE LL
HL_US
ENVELOPE LL
HL_UM E-STAR
LL
HL_US E-STAR
LL
PRE-JOB LL
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
49
1
1 to 99
1 to 99
60
Item
Item display
HL_UM READY
HH
HL_LM READY
HH
HL_US READY
HH
HL_UM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_LM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_US PLAIN
BW HH
HL_UM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_LM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_US PLAIN
CL HH
WARMUP
FUMON HL_UM
T HH
WARMUP
FUMOFF HL_LM
T HH
60
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-20
A:
55
1 99
A : 55
HL_UM READY LL
B : 55
HL_LM READY LL
C : 55
HL_US READY LL
D : 55
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
OK
43-21
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H) environment
for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM
43-01) for each paper.
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
25
25
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Content of item
Correction value for
TH_UM set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for
TH_LM set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for
TH_US set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_LM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_US set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_UM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_LM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_US set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
fusing motor front rotation
start TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Correction value for
fusing motor front rotation
end TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Item
L
Item display
Content of item
WARMUP END
TIME HH
HL_UM HEAVY
HH
HL_LM HEAVY
HH
HL_US HEAVY
HH
HL_UM OHP HH
HL_LM OHP HH
HL_US OHP HH
HL_UM
ENVELOPE HH
HL_LM
ENVELOPE HH
HL_US
ENVELOPE HH
E-STAR HH
HL_US E-STAR
HH
PRE-JOB HH
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
43-22
Purpose
: Setting
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
4)
50
50
1 to 99
50
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49)
50
49
1
1 to 99
50
Item
Display item
HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP LL
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT LL
HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP LL
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-21
A:
45
[ 1 99]
A : 45
HL_UM READY HH
B 45
HL_LM READY HH
C 45
HL_US READY HH
D 45
HL_UM PLAIN BW HH
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
25
25
OK
Item content
Correction value for upper
TH_UM BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_US BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper duplex
applicable number of
sheets under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_LM COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
Item
Display item
Item content
PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT LL
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
HL_UM PLAIN BW
DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN BW
DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN BW
DUP HH
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT HH
HL_UM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP HH
Display item
0
CLOSE
TEST
FUSSIMULATION NO.43-22
A:
60
1
99
A : 60
B : 60
C : 60
D : 50
OK
43-23
Purpose
: Setting
: Fusing
Item
Item content
Correction value for
TH_UM BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_US BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
BW plain paper duplex
applicable number of
sheets under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_LM COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets under
HH environment
: Operation
1)
2)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
FUSER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-23
TEMP ADJUSTMENT
45
1 99
(HH:DUP)
A : 45
B : 50
C : 45
HL_US
D : 50
PLAIN BW DUP HH
OK
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49)
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
5
45
45
0
TEST
25
25
1 to 99
49
1
50
Set value
Input value
1 to 99
4)
Default
value
45
Operation/Procedure
3)
Set
range
1 to 99
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
2)
3)
43-24
Purpose
: Setting
: Fusing
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set value
Input value
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
Display items
B
C
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
LL_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US
D
E
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
HH_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US
F
G
H
HH_120_WUP_HL_LM
ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
ON 120 WUP HL_US
J
K
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US
L
M
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
COOL_DOWN_OHP
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
WUP DUP TIME
Item descriptions
WARMUP end temperature
correction value
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Item HL_UM
Item HL_US
Cool-down time
Temperature correction
continuation time immediately
after completion of warm-up
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
120C or below when turning Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
on the power under LL
environment
Item HL_LM
120C or below when turning Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
on the power under HH
environment
Item HL_LM
Under NN environment
Under LL environment
Under HH environment
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
-
* On adjustment values
Each temperature correction value Temperature 1C change
by 1 count
Each paper exit count 1 sheet by 1 count
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
40
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
60
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
0 to 255
50
5
10
5
15
30
40
90
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-24
TEMP
A:
Default
value
50
0
TEST
FUSER
Set
range
1 to 99
RESET
50
1
99
A : 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
B : 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C : 50
LL_120_WUP_HL_UMHL_US
D : 50
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
OK
Display
44
AR_AUTO
44-1
Purpose
AR_ERROR
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process) section are enabled or not.
Section
Item
SENSITIVITY
PRT_HT
Operation/Procedure
1)
DM_PHASE
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_PROCO
N
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
Normal (Inhibit:
1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Set range
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
CLOSE
MODE SETTING
HV
MD
LD
TN_HUM
TN_PROCON
Content
Default
value
Allow
<Set items>
HV
SIMULATION NO.44-01
TEST
Display
Set range
Content
HT
MD
TC
EV
MD
MD
DL
MD
VG
DL
EV
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
Default
value
Allow
EXECUTE
1/2
44-2
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and the
registration sensor (two for resist are
adjusted simultaneously) and the surface
scan.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
* When an error occurs in the adjustment, "ERROR" is displayed in the value display section at the right of the error
item, and the drum motor is stopped. Data saving to
EEPROM is not performed at all and the operation is terminated. [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
* When there is a page over [], the display becomes active
and shifts up to another page. When there is no page over
[], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
* When there is a page under [], the display becomes active
and shifts down to another page. When there is nor page
under [], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
<Operation content>
1)
2)
After completion of the adjustment, check the belt surface condition with the BK sensor.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
REGIST
REGIST
Display item
PCS_CL LED ADJ
PCS_K LED ADJ
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
REG_R LED ADJ
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
REG_F PATCH (K)
REG_F PATCH (C)
REG_F PATCH (M)
REG_F PATCH (Y)
REG_R PATCH (K)
REG_R PATCH (C)
REG_R PATCH (M)
REG_R PATCH (Y)
Content
Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color dark voltage
Black dark voltage
Belt surface when item B adjustment is completed.
Belt surface input max. value
Belt surface input min. value
Belt surface input difference (Item E Item F)
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Registration sensor dark voltage F
Registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt surface when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt surface when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt surface input max. value (Front side)
Belt surface input min. value (Front side)
Belt surface input difference (Item O Item P)
Belt surface input max. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input min. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input difference (Item R Item S)
Patch light receiving potential F (K)
Patch light receiving potential F (C)
Patch light receiving potential F (M)
Patch light receiving potential F (Y)
Patch light receiving potential R (K)
Patch light receiving potential R (C)
Patch light receiving potential R (M)
Patch light receiving potential R (Y)
<List of errors>
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Save
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
44-4
Error name
Black sensor
adjustment error
Color sensor
adjustment error
Surface read error
Registration sensor F
adjustment error
Registration sensor R
adjustment error
Registration surface F
read error
Registration surface R
read error
Error content
PCS_K LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
PCS_CL LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times,
target not reached
PCS_K GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
REG_F LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
REG_R LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
REG_F GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
REG_R GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
Purpose
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, set the set values to
the default values.
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
: Setting
0
TEST
Set range
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 256
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
21
PCS_K GRND
21
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
0
EXECUTE
2)
1/4
3)
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Display content
PCS_CL TARGET
PCS_K TARGET
LED_CL OUTPUT
LED_K OUTPUT
PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
BELT GROUND
DIF
BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
Y_PAT TARGET
ID
M_PAT TARGET
ID
C_PAT TARGET
ID
K_PAT TARGET
ID
HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
J
K
L
M
N
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
1 to 255
155
1 to 255
21
1 to 255
21
1 to 255
1 to 255
255
0 to 255
0 to 255
1 to 255
60
1 to 255
123
1 to 255
140
1 to 255
132
1 to 255
1 to 255
29
Content description
Normal completion
Abnormal completion
Forcible interruption
Content description
Color sensor adjustment error (*)
Black sensor adjustment error (*)
K high density process control error
C high density process control error
M high density process control error
Y high density process control error
Timeout
0
TEST
PROCON
SIMULATION NO.4406
COMPULSORY
PRESS[EXECUTE]
TO
EXECUTION
START
0
PROCON
A:
INITIAL
DENSITY
108
1 255
SETUP
A : 108
PCS_C
TARGET
B : 155
PCS_K
TARGET
C : 21
LED_C
OUTPUT
D : 21
LED_K
OUTPUT
44-9
Purpose
OK
44-6
Purpose
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-04
TEST
CLOSE
: Operation test/Check
: Process
Item
: Operation
: Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters SIM 44-06, the screen shown on the
right is displayed.
2)
3)
4)
2)
OTHER
Page number
1/2
P (PROCON)
Left
N (M)
(NORMAL
(MIDDLE))
Right
2/2
N (L) (NORMAL
(LOW))
1/10
TN/TC
Left
Right
2/10
DRUM
3/10
VG
4/10
LD
5/10
HV
6/10
CP
7/10
DL
8/10
DL EV
Left
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
Default
value
GB: 630
DV: 430
GB: 630
DV: 430
GB: 600
DV: 400
1 to 14
0 to 1023
9
0
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 14
4
0
4
0
9
0 to 1023
0 to 4
0 to 20
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 100
50
100 to 100
Content description
Display range
Mode
Page number
OTHER
9/10
CRUM
Right
10/10
CNT
Left
DESTINATION
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
PROCON COUNT HV
PROCON COUNT HT
Content description
Destination
A
B EX Japan
C
B Japan
E
Control specification
AR control
AR control
AR control
AR control
AR control
Item
Display item
TARGET
(Page 1)
CARB DATA
SEAL ADJ
DATA
ADK_SL (K)
ADK_INT (K)
CLOSE
BLACK
CYAN
CYAN
YELLOW
YELLOW
ID(K)
ID(CMY)
1/2
OTHER
44-12
Purpose
PATCH
(Page 1
to 5)
Section
: Process
Item
N-1
N-2
N-3
0
CRUM
information
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
Content
description
Calibration plate
sensor value
Jig patch seal
sensor value
Developing
characteristics
gradient coefficient
Developing
characteristics
intercept
coefficient
Sensor target
value
Color sensor
target set value
Patch data nth
front patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth
center patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth rear
patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Display
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
1 to 255
108
9.99 to 9.99
999.9 to
999.9
0.00 to
255.00
0.00 to
255.00
0 to 255
0.00
0.00
0 to 255
0 to 255
Operation/Procedure
n = 1 to 2 Page 1
1)
n = 3 to 4 Page 2
n = 5 to 6 Page 3
Default
value
CRUM
information
SIMULATION NO.44-09
CPY/PRN
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
0 to 1
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
0
TEST
Display range
n = 7 to 8 Page 4
n = 9 to 10 Page 5
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-12
TARGET(K) : 0.00
TARGET(C) : 0.00
ADK SL(K)
: 0.00
TARGET(M) : 0.00
ADK INT(K)
: 0.0
TARGET(Y) : 0.00
CARB DATA
TARGET
PATCH
1/1
Display item
: Adjustment
: Process
Item
: Operation
TH_UM
TH_UM_AD1
Operation/Procedure
1)
<Operation contents>
1)
TH_UM_AD2
TH_LM
TH_US
TEMPRATURE
Display item
Description
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL LED
ADJ
Calibration plate
sensor value
Color dark voltage
B
C
HUMIDITY
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
0 to 255
NO
1 to 255
21
YES
Writing
YES
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4413
TH1_LSU
Description
Display range
Fusing upper
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
compensation
sensor temperature
(C)
AD value (AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
sensor AD value
(AD value)
Fusing lower
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Fusing upper
thermister sub A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Temperature
thermister
(Temperature/AD
value)
Humidity sensor
(Humidity/AD value)
Thermister 1 A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Default
value
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0.0 to 255.0 C
(0.2C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature: 40.0 to
60.0C (0.1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Humidity:
5.0 to 90.0% (0.1%)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Humidity:
5.0 to 60.0 C
(0.1C)
AD value: 0 to 255
Sensor
value
Sensor
value
108
:
21
PCS CL DARK
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
44-14
Purpose
TH_UM
255deg / XXX
255.0deg / XXX
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
XXX
TH_LM
255deg / XXX
TH_US
255deg / XXX
1/2
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-14
The machine enters this simulation, the current data are displayed.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
* Data are revised every 5sec.
* For the temperature and humidity only, data outside the range
are displayed as "-".
44-16
Purpose
: Process (Developing)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
TONER
DEN_LT(M)
TONER
DEN_ST(M)
TONER
DEN_LT(L)
TONER
DEN_ST(L)
Item content
Current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at
middle speed
Current toner density reference
value (including all the correction
values) at middle speed
Current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at low
speed
Current toner density reference
value (including all the correction
values) at low speed
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
129
128
129
128
Item content
Content description
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at middle speed)
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
128
127 to
127
1 to 999
500
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
128
127 to
127
1 to 999
127 to
127
500
0
Correction reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at low speed)
Correction reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Correction value for environment area
Correction value for humidity change
Correction value for document print rate
Correction value for high density process control result
Correction value for developer life
Correction for toner density sensor sensitivity
Item content
Content description
Sensor control voltage value (at middle speed) after executing SIM
25-02
Control voltage reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Sensor control voltage value (at low speed) after executing SIM 25-02
Control voltage reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Control voltage correction value for environment area
Control voltage correction value for humidity change
Control voltage correction value for document print rate
Control voltage correction value for high density process control result
Control voltage correction value for developer life
Control voltage correction value for toner density sensor sensitivity
Control voltage correction value under high temperature environment
* When the correction for the developer counter (life) or the humidity correction is inhibited (OFF) in SIM 44-01, the correction level is displayed as "0."
<Display of current humidity area and that in auto developer adjustment>
* Common to KCMY
Display item
AUTO DEVE AREA
AREA
Item content
Auto developer adjustment area
Current area
Content description
Auto developer adjustment humidity area display
Current humidity area display
Set
range
1 to 14
Default
value
8
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-16
TEST
TONER
44-22
Purpose
TONER DEN_LT(M)
TONER DEN_ST(M)
128
TONER DEN_LT(L)
128
128
TONER DEN_ST(L)
K
NEXT
1/1
44-21
Purpose
: Setting
: Process
Item
: Operation
Section
: Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone correction).
Section
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used to check that
the correction is normally executed or not.)
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
2)
Content description
1ST patch data display (n = 1 to 5)
2ND patch data display (n = 1 to 16)
TEST
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4422
TONE CORRECT
PTK/BASE
Display item
ID_n
ID_n
RESULT
PTC
PTM
PTC PTM
PTY
ID 1 :
255/255
255
255
PTY
255
ID 4 :
PTK/BASE
255/255
255
255
255
ID 2 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255/255
255
255
255
1ST STEP
0
TEST
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4421
TONE
TOUCH
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
2ND STEP
1/1
44-24
Purpose
: Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
REGISTER
START.
1)
EXECUTE
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next category are displayed regardless of the display page.
44-25
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Page
number
1/2
Display item
[STEP]
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
2/2
[MID]
[HIGH]
[CONNECT POINT]
Reference
value
Correction
value
1/1
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
For printer
1/3
[PRINTER_S_VALUE]
2/3
[PRINTER_BASE_DI
THER_VALUE]
3/3
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT
_VALUE]
Section
: Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
Content
[RIZE]
[SATURATE]
1)
Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
2)
3)
4)
Display
1ST PATCH
Set
range
0 to 255
2ND PATCH
0 to 255
3RD PATCH
0 to 255
4TH PATCH
0 to 255
5TH PATCH
0 to 255
Content
Half tone process control
1ST step 1st patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 2nd patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 3rd patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 4th patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 5th patch print
gradation
Default
value
40
60
80
100
255
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4424
TEST
HALF
TONE
[RIZE]
16
PROCON RESULT
DISPLAY
[SATURATE]
109
[EX-LOW]
A:
0.0
B:
[LOW]
A:-
0.013
B:-
0.569
0.0
B:
0.0
[CONNECT] A:
[STEP]
0
HALF
100.0
,
C:
107.444
TONE
A:
NEXT
PROCON
40
0
1/2
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-25
TEST
9.3
255
C
INITIAL
VALUE
DISPLAY
40
1ST PATCH
60
2ND
PATCH
80
3RD
PATCH
D 100
4TH
PATCH
OK
44-26
44-27
Purpose
: Adjustment
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
Section
: Process
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
1 to 15
3)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4427
TEST
HALF TONE
PROCON
ADJUSTMENT
DATA CLEAR
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4426
TEST
TONE
TOUCH
DENSITY
[EXECUTE]
CORRECT
THEN
44-28
Purpose
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
: Setting
START.
3)
Display
Process control
SW ON
execution YES/NO
setting
24H
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
HUM
REV1
YES
NO
REV2
YES
NO
INITIAL
PIX
YES
NO
YES
NO
HUM_LIMIT
HUM HOUR
HUM_DIF
BK_RATIO
M_RATIO
PIX_RATIO
YES
NO
Content
When supplying the power (when canceling sleep.)
When READY (sleep setting) is kept for 24H or more
The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored
every 2 hours (which can be set with Item I), and they are more
than the specified level (more than the set value of item 10)
compared with the previous process control.
When the power is supplied, and when the accumulated
traveling distance of BK or M position drum unit reaches a
certain level.
When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position
drum unit reaches a certain level from the previous density
correction.
When warming up after clearing the counter of OPC drum and
the developing unit.
When one of the accumulated toner counts for each colors
reaches over the specified count from the previous high density
correction.
The set conditions of item C are added to the set conditions of
items A to G.
Item
0
CLOSE
A:
0
0 1
A 0
SW ON NO
B 0
24H YES
C 0
HUM YES
D 0
REV1 YES
Default value
0
0
0
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
0
1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 24
1 to 9
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
100
Example: SW ON:YES
SIMULATION NO.4428
Set range
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval setting (H:
Hour)
Specified value of area difference compared with that in the previous process
control execution of item C
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of BK position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of M position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Pitch count zoom ratio setting (%)
TEST
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
A
B
C
D
Display
item
COPY
PRINTER
FAX
SELF
PRINT
Description
of item
Copier
Printer
FAX
Self print
Set range
0 to 4
0: No execution
1: HV only
2: HV PHT
3: HV HT
4: HV PHT HT
Default
value
4
2
2
4
0
TEST
44-29
HALF
Purpose
: Process
Item
: Operation
TONE
SETTING
A 4
: Setting
A:
4
0 4
COPY : HV
B 2
PRINTER : HVPHTHT
C 2
FAX : HVPHT
D 4
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-29
2)
3)
5)
44-31
Purpose
Section
Item
: Adjustment
6)
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Adjustment
2)
Enter "3" with 10-key in the print mode of set item A to change
the set value. (Default is 3.)
3)
4)
Use [] button to shift to the paper of set item "C" and enter "3"
with 10-key. (The default is 3.)
7)
8)
9)
10) To check the deflection in the set value, enter "3" to set item A
with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE] button to print one sheet of
the drum deflection adjustment pattern.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
original state.
* For cassette selection, the manual feed cassette is set. (Set item
C is 1)
Description
Print mode
90deg
90 degree
SET VALUE
B
COLOR
PAPER
45 degree
SET VALUE
Phase adjustment value
BK CL
Cassette selection
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
POSITION
A:
1
3
3
SETTING
A 3
B 2
COLOR
C 3
MODESET VALUE
PAPER:CS2
EXECUTE
OK
Default
value
3
(SET
VALUE)
Writing
NO
3
1 to 8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
YES
3
(CS2)
NO
44-43
Purpose
Set
range
1 to 3 1
: Process (Developing)
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
A
B
C
D
DVCH KIND K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH KIND Y
Display
range
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
E
F
G
H
DVCH_AD_K
DVCH_AD_C
DVCH_AD_M
DVCH_AD_Y
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Item
Item name
Item content
Remark
Developing unit model identification information saved in EEPROM on the
machine side.
A judgment is made by verifying this information and the model information in
CRUM. Since the result (OK or NG) is known when warming up, the error
display is not required in SIM. The display is made by the division code of 1
to 9 instead of the model name.
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Display item
ID_n
Content description
Patch data display
(n = 1 to 16)
0
1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
PTK
PTC
ID 1 :
255
255
255
ID 4 :
255
255
255
UNIT
AD
255
ID 2 :
255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255
255
255
255
ID 6 :
255
255
255
255
1/3
MONITOR
DVCH KIND K
DVCH AD K
44-54
DVCH KIND C
DVCH AD C
Purpose
DVCH KIND M
DVCH AD M
DVCH KIND Y
DVCH AD Y
1/1
44-52
Purpose
Section
: Process
Item
: Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
PTM PTY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-43
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4452
TEST
0
DEVELOPER
Display range
0 to 255
2)
Page number
1/2
Display item
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
Reference
register value
Correction value
Content
EXTRA lowest density area approximation formula
coefficient
Low density approximation formula coefficient
[MID]
2/2
[HIGH]
1/1
[CONNECT SENSOR]
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
Display range
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C:-255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
#1 to #4: 0 to 255
#1 to #15
#1 to #15
* When the display item is not executed yet, is displayed. In case of an error, ERR is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
0
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF
[EX-LOW]
A:
[LOW]
TONE RESULT
01.000
A:
-10.000
B:
-200.000
10.000
B:
-150.000
[MID]
05.000
B:
200.000
A:
1PIXEL HALF
100.000
TOUGH
, C: 200.000
, C:
NEXT
: Process
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
CORRECT
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
EXECUTE
44-57
DENSITY
THEN
1/2
: Setting
Section
TONE
[EXECUTE]
150.000
44-56
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4456
TEST
DISPLAY
B:
[CONNECT] A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4454
Purpose
: Data clear
: Process
Item
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
* In case of a sensor adjustment error, press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4457
ADJUSTMENT
YES
DATA CLEAR
NO
EXECUTE
46
Item
Display
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
46-1
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
R
S
T
Operation/Procedure
1)
Description
Photograph(Color
tone enhancement)
Map (Color tone
enhancement)
Single color
Single color (Copy
document)
2-color (red/black)
copy
2-color (red/black)
copy (Copy
document)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
0
S I M U LA TI O N
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
N O . 4 6 01
50
1 99
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Set
range
1 to 99
A 50
AUTO
B 50
TEXT
C 50
D 50
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
3)
46-2
Purpose
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
K
L
M
Display
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photo
Printed photo
Photograph
Map
Light density
document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Print (Copy
document)
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo (Color
enhancement)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Description
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
3)
When [OK], [], [], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Display
Content
A
B
C
D
E
F
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
Auto1
Auto2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
Display
Content
G
H
I
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
K
L
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4602
TEST
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
50
1 99
EXPOSURE
A:
TEXT/PHOTO
D 50
PTINTED PHOTO
PHOTO
: Adjustment
A 50
AUTO1
Section
: Scanner
B 50
AUTO2
Item
: Adjustment
C 50
TEXT
Operation/Procedure
D 50
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
1)
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
TEXT/PRINTED
C 50
3)
TEXT
B 50
Purpose
46-4
2)
1 99
A 50
OK
OK
1)
ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[ SCANNER]
50
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4604
46-5
0
EXPOSURE
0
TEST
Display
A
B
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C
D
E
F
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Content
Text
Text/Printed
Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK], [], [], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
AUTO TEXT
AUTO TEXT/PRINT
PHOTO
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Auto text
Auto text/Print Photo
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
Auto text/Photo
TExt
Text/Print Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Display
Content
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4605
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
50
1 99
A 50
AUTO TEXT
B 50
AUTO
C 50
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D 50
TEXT
TEXT/PRINT
PHOTO
OK
46-8
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a desired color with [B] [G] [R] buttons. (In this example,
[B] is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK], [], [], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
3)
Display
Content
COPY: LOW
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
SCAN: LOW
FAX: LOW
COPY: HIGH
SCAN: HIGH
FAX: HIGH
4)
Display
Content
LOW DENSITY
POINT
HIGH DENSITY
POINT
Default
value
50
TEST
1 to 99
50
1 99
B
A 50
LOW
1 to 99
42
1 to 99
53
1 to 99
53
1 to 99
53
ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
42
1 99
A 42
COPY LOW
B 42
SCANLOW
C 42
FAXLOW
D 53
COPYHIGH
OK
46-10
B 50
HIGH
DENSITY POINT
Purpose
DENSITY POINT
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
42
CLOSE
50
1 to 99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4609
EXPOSURE
A:
SIMULATION NO.4608
A:
Default
value
42
0
Set
range
1 to 99
0
TEST
Set
range
1 to 99
OK
Section
: Engine
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
46-9
Purpose
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Item
: Adjustment
2)
Select a color.
* Select [K](BLACK), [C](CYAN), [M](MAGENTA), or [Y](YELLOW) button. The selected button is displayed and the
adjustment value of the selected color is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
46-16
Purpose
Section
: Engine
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
6)
5)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
<Setting item>
Item
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Printed Photo
Photo+Text/Photo
Map
Light density document
Copy document
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
3)
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
Item content
TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4610
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
0
TEST
ENGINE
TEST
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG print.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4616
COLOR
BALANCE
500
373627
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A500
POINT1
B500
POINT2
C500
POINT3
D500
POINT4
EXECUTE
1/1
OK
2)
46-19
Purpose
: Setting
: Scanner
Item
: Operation
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the current set status
is highlighted.
2)
Press a set value button to be changed, and the button is highlighted and the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. (In
this example, [MODE2] button is pressed.)
Content
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_COPY
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
Set value
MODE1,
MODE2
ON/OFF
Default
value
MODE1
ON
ON/OFF
ON
ON/OFF
ON
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.46-19
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
CLOSE
MODE1
OFF
ON
AE STOP FAX
OFF
ON
AE STOP SCAN :
MODE2
AE STOP COPY :
OFF
ENGINE COLOR
ON
A:
1/1
500
Purpose
BALANCE
245~755
46-21
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4621
TEST
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A500
POINT1
B500
POINT2
C500
POINT3
D :500
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
: Engine
Item
: Adjustment
46-23
Purpose
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Display
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
Content
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
0
ENGINE MAXIMUM
DENSITY
A 0
A:
ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
MODE
(0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4623
TEST
EXECUTE
OK
(48-patch print)
46-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Engine
Item
: Adjustment
CLOSE
TEST
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
While the high density process control is executed, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 end screen automatically, and the reference value registration process 2 (BLACK) is executed automatically.
9)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SERVICE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
REPEAT
OK
TEST
CLOSE
PLEASE WAIT.
OK
46-26
0
TEST
Purpose
CLOSE
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
QUIT
THIS
Section
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
MODE.
1)
46-25
Purpose
2)
: Adjustment
Section
Item
: Adjustment
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* After completion of default reset of the single color mode
color balance set value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure
Select a color to be set. (In this example, [C] (Cyan) is
selected.)
* When a color button ([C](Cyan), [M](Magenta), [Y](Yellow))
is selected, the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value of the selected button is displayed.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4626
SINGLE COLOR
MODE
STANDARD
RATE SETUP
ARE
Description
Range
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
TEST
Purpose
A:
255
0 255
A255
RED
B255
GREEN
BLUE
D255
YES
NO
EXECUTE
: Adjustment
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4625
SURE?
46-27
0
SINGLE COLOR
YOU
SETUP
2)
3)
YELLOW
OK
Display
Set range
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
99
Item
: Adjustment
1)
2)
50
Section
3)
A:
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
46-28
Purpose
A 50
BLACK
TEXT (SLOPE)
B 50
BLACK
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C 50
COLOR
TEXT (SLOPE)
D 50
COLOR
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
* Pressing [NEXT] button displays the next category data regardless of the display page.
OK
COLOR AE
(Color auto
exposure)
Detail of category
Display
RESULT
(Judgment result)
COL/MONO
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
RESULT
(Judgment result)
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
COLOR
MONO
Content
Set range/
Number of
digits
1 to 2
ACSCONT
2 kinds
COLOR
(COLOR
BLACK
document,
Monochrome
document)
ACS judgment counter value
Max. 10 digits
SITAJI_JUDGE
0 to 32
RATE_SCR
SHITAJI
BEAT_JUDGE
SUM_SITAJI_SCR
Mesh ratio
Base number judgment result
Background judgment result
Base area mesh number
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
Max. 10 digits
Remark
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Category
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
RESULT
(Judgment result)
Display
ORIGINAL
BACKGROUND
MESH
HTFE
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
HTCNT
PHOTOCNT
STRCNT
FLATCNT
PREHTCNT
HTXTCNT
SUMF
SUMM_L
SUMM_H
SUMFM_L
SUMFM_H
FHSTDR
FHSTDG
FHSTDB
HTHSTDR
TXT
TXT/HT
HT
TXT/PIC
PIC
TXT ON HT
OHT
GR
WH
NE
WH_GR
WH_NE
WH_CO
CO
IM
IMAGE
BASE
HIGH
LOW
Content
Document
Auto text
Auto text mesh
Auto mesh
Auto text/photo
Auto photo
Auto text on dot
Other auto
Base
None
Gray
White
Newspaper
White gray
White newspaper
White color
Color
Image
Mesh
No mesh
Image mesh
Base mesh (Non-image
mesh)
Line
High number of lines
Low number of lines
Mesh counter value
Photographic paper counter value
Text counter value
Background counter value
Document type judgment mesh counter
value
Text on mesh counter value
Flat mesh counter value
Total of Max. reverse numbers (lower
32bit)
Total of Max. reverse numbers (Upper
4bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (lower 32bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (Upper 4bit)
Background pixel histogram value
(RED)
Background pixel histogram value
(GREEN)
Background pixel histogram value
(BLUE)
Mesh pixel histogram value (RED)
Set range/
Number of
digits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
1
0
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
#1 to #32 display A3
pixel number
Category
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
Display
HTHSTDG
HTHSTDB
LHSTD
Content
REVERSE AVE
REVERSE AVE(FLAT)
FLAT SELECT
Flat section
mesh pixel
comparison
MDHSTD
OHSTDR
OHSTDG
OHSTDB
SUM_BETA_RGB
EREA_BETA RGB
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB
RATE_BETA
SHITAJI
BETA_JUDGE
RATE_SCR
RATE_SCR2
RATE_TSCR
HTFE_JUDGE
SCR_HIST_JUDGE
SCR_CNT_JUDGE
TSCR_JUDGE
SCR_JUDGE
RATE_OTHER
TEXT_JUDGE
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE
OTHER_JUDGE
PHOTO_JUDGE
TH_BETA2
TH_BETA_PHT2
TH_SCR2
TH_SCR_CNT2
TH_TSCR_CNT2
TH_TEXT2
TH_PHOTO2
ALLCNT
HTFE RESULT
HIGH2
HIGH1
LOW1
LOW2
YES
NO
Set range/
Number of
digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
0 to 32
0 to 16
0 to 16
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
Max. 3 digits
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 5
0 to 10000
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
A3 pixel
number
Max. 2 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
2
A3 pixel number
1
3
4
0 to 100.00
0 to 100.00
0
1
(Initial screen)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
: Setting
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, keep the default values except for the following items. For the following items,
change the set values according to the necessity.
COLOR AE(SW MODE 1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO / TH MAX
COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS(SIM LEVEL)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
7)
COLOR AE
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
THCLMK_1
THCLBK_1
C
D
ACSMSK_1
THCLMK_2
THCLBK_2
F
G
ACSMSK_2
THCLMK_3
THCLBK_3
I
J
ACSMSK_3
THCLMK_4
THCLBK_4
L
M
ACSMSK_4
THCLMK_5
THCLBK_5
O
P
ACSMSK_5
SIM_LEVEL
TH_ACS5_RT
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
SW_MODE1
SW_MODE2
SW_MODE3
SW_MODE4
SW_MODE5
SW_MODE6
SW_MODE7
TH_MAX_MONO
TH_MAX_COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_SCR1
SW_MODE_SCR2
SW_MODE_MIX
N
A
B
SW_HOSEI
TH_MODE_SCR
TH_SITAJI_SCR
Default
value
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Screen
type
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
13
0 100
50
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0 32
000030000
0 32
01
13
01
12
0 8 (-4 +4)
0 10000
0 10000
1
1
0
0
0
0
17
17
0
3
0
2
4
03000
03000
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
MVSTRSEL REDUCE
MVSTRSEL ENLARGE
PSEL1 REDUCE
PSEL1 ENLARGE
PSEL2 REDUCE
PSEL2 ENLARGE
BUSYSEL REDUCE
BUSYSEL ENLARGE
HTSEL REDUCE
AREA
ORG
HTSEL ENLARGE
AREA
ORG
ASEL REDUCE
ASEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL REDUCE
HSTSEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL2 REDUCE
HSTSEL2 ENLARGE
TH_SUM_BETARGB
TH_BETA_SUB
TH_WHITE_BETA
TH_GRAY_BETA1
TH_GRAY_BETA2
TH_NOISE REDUCE
TH_NOISE ENLARGE
X
Y
SW_SCR1
SW_SCR2
02
Default
value
0
02
01
01
02
02
01
01
0
1
0
1
0 23
16
0 23
16
03
03
03
03
0 32
0 32
0 32
25
0 32
18
0 32
25
0 32
10
0 32
10
01
01
0
0
Screen
type
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
SCR RECOG
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
TH_HTFE
AA
AB
SW_TSCR
TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB
AC
TH_BETA_RT
AD
TH_SCR_RT
AE
TH_SCR_CNT_RT
AF
TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT
AG
TH_TEXT_RT
AH
TH_PHOTO_RT
AI
TH_BETA_PHT_RT
TH_BETA ENLARGE
TH_SCR ENLARGE
C
D
TH_SCR_RATE
TH_SCR_CNT EL
TH_MANSEN_RATE
TH_TSCR_RATE
TH_TSCR_CNT EL
TH_TEXT ENLARGE
TH_PHOTO ENLARGE
TH_BETA_RATE
TH_BETA_PHT_EL
TH_OTHER
THBAVEM1 REDUCE
THBAVEM1 ENLARGE
THBAVEM2 REDUCE
THBAVEM2 ENLARGE
THBAVEM3 REDUCE
Default
value
03
01
0 32
1
15
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
1000000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
20000
0 10000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000800000
0 10000
1500
0 10000
00300
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000010000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000050000
0 10000
03000
0 134217727
100000
0 10000
07000
0 255
170
0 255
170
0 255
105
0 255
105
0 255
50
Screen
type
04500
000050000
Category
SCR RECOG
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits or
less setting
4 digits
or less
setting
Text-onmesh ON/
OFF (auto/
manual
mode)
Print
document
text
detection
level
Display
Content
THBAVEM3 ENLARGE
CMSUB1 REDUCE
CMSUB1 ENLARGE
CMSUB2 REDUCE
CMSUB2 ENLARGE
MREVSEL REDUCE
MREVSEL ENLARGE
MSDSEL REDUCE
MSDSEL ENLARGE
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
THAVEFM1 REDUCE
THAVEFM1 ENLARGE
THAVEFM2 REDUCE
THAVEFM2 ENLARGE
THAVEFM3 REDUCE
THAVEFM3 ENLARGE
THAVEM1 REDUCE
THAVEM1 ENLARGE
THAVEM2 REDUCE
THAVEM2 ENLARGE
THAVEM3 REDUCE
THAVEM3 ENLARGE
MESH_TXT ON HT
0 255
Default
value
50
0 255
55
0 255
55
0 255
0 255
03
03
01
01
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0
0
3
(THROUGH)
1 (OFF)
65
96
54
80
48
70
65
96
54
80
48
70
0
MESH_TXT/HT1
MESH_TXT/HT2
D
E
MESH_TXT/PR
PR_TXT ON HT
PR_TXT/HT1
PR_TXT/HT2
H
I
PR_TXT/PR
PR_CHECK1(*2)
PR_CHECK2(*2)
PR_CHECK3(*2)
ON
OFF
PR_CHECK4(*2)
ON
OFF
THWMAX(*2)
THWMIN(*2)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(THROUGH)
2 (ON1)
0
2
3 (ON2)
0
(THROUGH)
1(ON1)
2 (ON2)
0
1
3 (ON3)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0 255
0
220
0 255
153
0
1
0
0
Screen
type
Category
SEGMENT
4 digits
or less
setting
Item
Chroma
saturation/
No Chroma
saturation
judgment
level
Color auto
document
recognition
filter
emphasis
setting
Specification
mode area
separate
(ON/OFF
setting)
INDEX
direct
appointment
Quantity of
detection
adjustment
Content
Display
COLOR_PRINT MODE
Print mode
COLOR_PHOTO MODE
COLOR_CHECK1
(*3)
COLOR_CHECK2
(*3)
THILVC(*3)
THACOLL(*3)
THACOLH(*3)
THILVG(*3)
THAGRYL(*3)
THAGRYH(*3)
SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
H
L
AUTO
SEG_ACT_A_OTR
AA
SEG_ACT_M_PRT1
AB
SEG_ACT_M_PRT2
AC
SEG_DS_A_TOH
AD
SEG_DS_M_TPP
AE
AF
AG
AH
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL
SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL
SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2
SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL
SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR
SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH
BKUCR_ACTM (
THROUGH
99%)
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTM
THROUGH
(100% 199%)
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTM
THROUGH
(200% )
OFF
ON
AU
AV
Default
value
0
(THROUGH)
(THROUGH)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
100% 199%
200%
0
3
1(OFF)
2(ON1)
3(ON2)
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 255
0
0
166
0 255
21
0 255
18
0 255
118
0 255
14
0 255
20
13
3 (Auto)
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0 512
0 512
1
1
1
0
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
10
10
10
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
10
10
10
10
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0
0
2
1
2
0
0
2
1
2
0
0
2
1
2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
Screen
type
Category
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits
or less
setting
Quantity of
detection
adjustment
AW
BKUCR_ACTA (
99%)
AX
Text on
mesh ON/
OFF (Auto/
Manual
mode)
0
2
100% 199%
0
2
THROUGH
200%
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
THROUGH
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTA
(100% 199%)
AY
5 digits
or more
setting
Content
Display
THROUGH
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTA
(200% )
MESH_CHECK1
MESH_CHECK2
MESH_CHECK3
ON
OFF
MESH_CHECK4
ON
OFF
THED3A(*1)
THED3B(*1)
0
1
Default
value
0
Screen
type
0
1
0 65535
0
1000
0 65535
1000
(Initial screen)
46-36
0
TEST
COLOR
AUTO
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4633
0 9
Purpose
A 0
THCLMK_1
B 0
THCLBK_1
Section
C 0
ACSMSK_1
Item
: Image quality
D 0
THCLMK_2
Operation/Procedure
BACK
NEXT
OK
1)
0
COLOR AUTO
MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-33
5DIGIT
OVER)
PRESENT 000010000
SET
NEW
TEST
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2color (Red, Black) copy.
2)
TH_ACS5ENLARGE
BACK
NEXT
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
Item
Display
Content
Color
button
Set
range
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
PARAMETER O
PARAMETER M
PARAMETER INTENSITY
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Default value
C
M
Y
3
3
3
0
255 255
255
0
255
255 255
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
0
255
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-36
TEST
A:
3
0
A 3
PARAMETER
B 3
PARAMETER
C 3
PARAMETER
INTENSITY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4637
TEST
A:
35
RANGE
COEFFICIENT
OK
46-37
A 35
R/G
B 0
B/G
99
DEFAULT
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
46-39
Purpose
: Adjustment
Purpose
: Adjustment
Section
Section
: FAX
Item
: Image quality
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
3)
4)
5)
Display
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI] ON
Display
R/G
B/G
Content
Gray forming setting (R/G)
Gray forming setting (B/G)
Set
range
0 to 99
0 to 99
Default
value
35
0
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI] ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI] ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI] ON
half tone
Set
range
0 to 2
Default
value
1
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
Content
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
ON
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI]
ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI]
ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI]
ON
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-39
TEST
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
A:
0 2
A 1
200
100
DPI
OFF
B 1
200
200
DPI
OFF
C:
200
200
DPI
ON
D:
200
400
DPI
OFF
2)
3)
OK
46-40
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Content
Exposure data value
(Collective)
TEST
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
A:
TEST
EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
A:
50
EXECUTE
ADJUSTMENT(FAXNORMAL)
50
1
1 99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-41
EXPOSURE
ADJUSTMENT(FAXALL)
A 50
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
0
EXPOSURE
Auto
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print
Auto
mode Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-40
Content
99
A 50
AUTO
B 50
EXPOSURE1
C 50
EXPOSURE2
D 50
EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE
OK
46-41
46-42
Purpose
Purpose
: Adjustment
OK
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Section
: MFP/FAX
: Image quality
Item
: Image quality
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Content
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-42
A:
50
[ 1~ 99]
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
2)
3)
OK
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
46-43
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
TEST
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Content
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
1)
0
CLOSE
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
3)
OK
46-44
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
SIMULATION NO.46-43
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Default value
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
M
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
1)
0
CLOSE
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
: Adjustment
: FAX
Item
: Image quality
2)
3)
OK
46-45
Purpose
SIMULATION NO.46-44
Default value
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Default value
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Content
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-45
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
Operation/Procedure
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
ADJUSTMENT(FAX600DPI)
50
1 99
A 50
AUTO
B 50
EXPOSURE1
C 50
EXPOSURE2
D 50
EXPOSURE3
OK
46-47
Purpose
: Setting
Item
: Setting
2)
3)
Item
A
COPY (GRAY)
Display
COPY (C)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
COPY (G)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
SCAN (C)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
PUSH SCAN (GRAY)
SCAN (G)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
Content
Low compression (Color)
Middle compression (Color)
High compression (Color)
Low compression (Gray)
Middle compression (Gray)
High compression (Gray)
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4647
0
0
A 0
COPY(C) LOW
B 0
COPY(G) LOW
C 0
SCAN(C) MIDDLE
C 0
SCAN(G) MIDDLE
2
0
0 (MIDDLE1)
1
2
3)
48
48-1
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system (for RSPF).
Section
: RSPF/Scanner
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
0 (MIDDLE1)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
Purpose
0 (LOW)
A:
Default value
0 (LOW)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
0
TEST
Set range
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
Display
CCD (MAIN)
CCD (SUB)
SPF (MAIN)
SPF (SUB)
SPFB (MAIN)
SPFB(SUB)
Content
SCAN, main scan
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN, sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
RSPF document back
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
RSPF document back
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
3)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Display
A
B
MR (HI)
MR (MID)
C
D
MR (LO)
RSPF (HI)
RSPF (MID)
RSPF(LO)
1 99
A:
CLOSE
1 to 99
50
SPEED
ADJUSTMENT
199
A 50
MR(HI)
B 50
MR(MID)
C 50
MR(LO)
D 50
RSPF(HI))
CCD(MAIN)
B 50
CCD(SUB)
C 50
SPF(MAIN)
D 50
SPF(SUB)
OK
OK
48-6
Purpose
: Adjustment
48-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a different copy magnification ratio is specified and
copying is made after adjustment of the sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio with SIM 48-1.
Section
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted.
This is the magnification ratio adjustment in
the scan system.
Section
: RSPF/Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
2)
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4805
50
1)
1 to 99
0
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
50
50
50
LO=78.5mm/sec
MOTOR
A:
1 to 99
1 to 99
MID=157mm/sec
A 50
Default
value
50
50
<Reference speed>
SIMULATION NO.4801
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
HI=248mm/sec
TEST
Content
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
* When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder or file selection
screen.
Display
RRM
Resist motor
correction value
DVM_K/
BTM
FSM
DM_K
PFM
Mode select
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Developing K
motor correction
value
Color
COLOR
Fusing motor
correction value
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Drum K motor
correction value
DM_CL
Content
Drum CL motor
correction value
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Heavy paper
HEAVY
COLOR
Set
range
Default
value
1 to 99
50
54
1 to 99
45
37
43
1 to 69
43
1 to 69
43
3)
The current version and the update version are displayed for
each firmware.
1 to 99
50
4)
*1
G
POM
COLOR
*1
1 to 99
50
FUSER
SETTING
HEAVY
1 to 99
50
* Adjustment value
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is
changed by about 0.1%.
5)
0
VELOCITY
A:
199
COLOR
ADJUSTMENT
50
A 50
RRM
B 45
DVM_K/BTM
C 40
FSM
D 43
DM _K
MONO
7)
HEAVY
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48 06
TEST
49
49-1
Purpose
: Version-up
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: To update the firmware, set DIP SW 2 on the MFP control
PWB to ON.
1)
Item description
CONFIG
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOTM)
ICU (BOOTS)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
PCU (BOOT)
PCU (MAIN)
DESK (BOOT)
DESK (MAIN)
A4LCC (BOOT)
A4LCC (MAIN)
FIN (BOOT)
FIN (MAIN)
INSERTER (BOOT)
INSERTER (MAIN)
1KFIN (BOOT)
1KFIN (MAIN)
4KFIN (BOOT)
4KFIN (MAIN)
A3LCC (BOOT)
A3LCC (MAIN)
SCU (BOOT)
SCU (MAIN)
DSPF (BOOT)
DSPF (MAIN)
FAX1 (BOOT)
FAX1 (MAIN)
FAX OPTION (BOOT)
FAX OPTION (MAIN)
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
IMAGE_DATA
COLOR PROFILE
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program
(Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC (A4) boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher boot section
Inner finisher main section
Inserter boot section *1
Inserter main section *1
1K Finisher boot section
1K Finisher main section
4K Finisher boot section *1
4K Finisher main section *1
Side LCC (A3) boot section *1
Side LCC (A3) main section *1
SCU
Main section
DSPF boot section *1
DSPF main section *1
FAX1 line (Boot section)
FAX1 line (Main section)
FAX2 line (Boot section)
FAX2 line (Main section)
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Color profile
Number of
digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
TEST
FIRMWARE
FILE1
<DIR> FOLDER2
..
1/1
49-3
Purpose
: Version-up
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Insert the USB memory into the machine.
* When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder selection screen
1.
2)
8 digits
8 digits
3)
4)
FOLDER1
FILE2
1)
UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR>
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
Item description
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program (Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU Boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit Boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC(A4) Boot section
Side LCC(A4) main section
Inner Finisher Boot section
Inner Finisher main section
1K Finisher Boot section
1K Finisher main section
SCU
Main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 main section
FAX2 Boot section
FAX2 main section
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Animation data
Image ASIC data
5)
6)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL
UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1
<DIR>
FOLDER2
<DIR> FOLDER3
<DIR>
MANUAL1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR>
MANUAL2
50-1
Purpose
1/1
..
50
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
<DIR>
: Adjustment
MANUAL3
1/1
..
3)
Display item
Lead edge adjustment
RRCA
value
B
C
D
E
F
G
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
Image loss quantity set
value
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Description
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
The timing from start of document scan to recognition of the image lead
edge is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing is. The greater the set
value is, the slower the timing is.
Resist motor ON timing adjustment
Standard cassette
The timing to turn ON the resist roller from reception Desk
of the resist signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
LCC
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing
Manual feed
is. The greater the set value is, the slower the
ADU
timing is.
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. The difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
(0.1mm/step))
* The greater the value is, the grater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss quantity is specified. (Document width Document
edge scan range) / 2 (0.1mm/step)
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper lead edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scan direction print range adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment
The void quantities formed at the right and left edges are adjusted.
(0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Set range
0 to 99
Default value
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
20
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
20
1 to 99
20
1 : Dec. 15 2005
0
EDGE
A:
ADJUSTMENT
50
0
99
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
TEST
LEAD
VALUE
A 50
RRCA
B 50
RRCB-CS12
C 50
RRCB-CS34
D 50
RRCB-LCC
OK
L1
50-2
Purpose
Paper lead
edge
: Adjustment
Item
L2
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Fig. 1
3)
Place a ruler along the left edge of the document table, and
make a black copy in 400%.
5)
6)
Make a black copy in 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
Display item
Actual measured L1
value
L2
Image loss
LEAD
quantity set value
SIDE
Void quantity
setting
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Description
Distance between the image lead edge and the scale of 10mm (Platen 400%,
unit of 0.1mm)
Distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge (unit of 0.1mm)
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. Difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss (SIDE) is specified. (Document width Document edge
scan range / 2
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity at the paper lead edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scanning direction print range adjustment
The void quantity at the paper rear edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void quantity adjustment
The void quantities at the left and right edges of paper are specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Set range
0 to 999
Default value
0 to 999
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
20
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
20
1 to 99
20
A to G:1step = 0.1mm
A. Document lead edge reference position: (L1), B. Paper lead
edge positions
Except for A and B, same as the item adjusted with SIM50-01.
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
lead edge reference position (RRC-A) and all the paper lead edge
positions (RRCB-**).
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-02
TEST
A:
60
0
999
60
L1
L2
30
LEAD
15
SIDE
EXECUTE
50-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Image quality
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, self print is resumed.
4)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Measure the dimensions of void area in the right and the left
frame direction of the adjustment pattern to check that the
dimensions are as follows:
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
<Description of item>
1 to 99
Default
value
30
DEN-B
1 to 99
20
FRONT/REAR
1 to 99
20
D
E
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
1 to 99
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
Item
Description of item
Set range
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
A:
30
[ 1~99 ]
1 (NO)
50-6
Purpose
0
TEST
Remark
Adjustment value to fit with the print lead edge for the printer.
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the
printer print start position is shifted toward the lead edge in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
Void quantity formed at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment
value of Item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub scanning
direction print range adjustment value in the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
Adjustment of void quantity formed at the right and left edges of
paper. The greater the value is, the greater the void quantity is.
A : 30
DEN-C
B : 20
DEN-B
C : 20
FRONT/REAR
D: 1
MULTI COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
50-7
Purpose
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Item
: Image quality
1)
In advance, execute the SPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio (SIM48-01).
2)
Item
Display item
Description
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Front surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Back surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Front surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Front surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Front surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Back surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Back surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Back surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
Operation/Procedure
The highlighted section is and the value is displayed in the setting area.
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
0 to 99
Set L4 and L5 to 0.
When the values of L4 and L5 are changed to 0, the following
adjustment values are automatically set.
20
20
0 to 99
30
4)
5)
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
A,B: The greater the value is, the slower the scan timing is.
The greater the adjustment values of C to H are, the greater the
image loss is.
Distance A
A to H: 1 step = 0.1 m
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
0
SIMULATION NO.50-06
TEST
CLOSE
A:
50
[
1~
99 ]
A : 50
SIDE1
B : 50
SIDE2
C : 20
LEAD EDGE
D : 20
FRONT_REAR
OK
1 : Dec. 15 2005
<Description of item>
Item
A
Display item
L4
L5
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
D
E
F
G
H
Description of item
Distance from the front
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm (SPF
200%, unit 0.1mm)
Distance from the back
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm (SPF
200%, unit 0.1mm)
Image loss quantity setting
SIDE1
Set
range
0 to 999
Default
value
0 to 999
CLOSE
C:
20
0
999
L4
L5
20
LEAD_EDGE(SIDE1)
20
FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)
EXECUTE
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
50-10
Purpose
: Adjustment
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
A to H: 1step=0.1mm
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
<Calculation formula>
1
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
value *
( L4 - Correction
)
2*
value *
(L5 - Correction
)
2*
SIMULATION NO.50-07
TEST
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
L5.
<Description of item>
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Item content
Main scan print magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment value (manual feed)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 1)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 2)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 3)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 4)
Print off-center adjustment value (LCC)
Print off-center adjustment value (ADU)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
Set range
60 to 140
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
Default value
100
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
2 (CS1)
Writing
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
Shift the pixel center position. The default value of the center is
3750 pixels.
A to C: When the adjustment value is increased, the center position
is shifted to the rear side. 1step=0.1mm
SIMULATION NO.5012
TEST
CLOSE
A:
* Adjustment direction
+ direction: Enlargement of magnification ratio
50
1
99
50
OC
50
SPF(SIDE1)
50
SPF(SIDE2)
OK
50-20
Purpose
0
TEST
PAPER CENTER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5010
OFFSET
100
60140
SETUP
A100
BK-MAG
B50
MFT
C50
CS1
D50
CS2
Section
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
OK
50-12
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
Item
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
: Adjustment
Example: PAPER:CS1
Display item
OC
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
Set range
OC document off-center
adjustment
SPF front surface off-center
adjustment
SPF back surface off-center
adjustment
Set
value
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
<Description of item>
Item
A
CYAN (REAR)
MAGENTA (FRONT)
MAGENTA (REAR)
YELLOW (FRONT)
YELLOW (REAR)
G
H
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description of item
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
A:
100
1199
DIRECTION
A100
CYAN(FRONT)
B100
CYAN(REAR)
C100
MAGENTA(FRONT)
D100
MAGENTA(REAR)
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
3 (CS2)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
2)
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 to 199
: Adjustment
Item
YES
50-21
Section
100
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
Purpose
1 to 199
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5020
Writing
YES
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
TEST
Default value
100
Example: PAPER:CS1
Set range
1 to 199
<Description of item>
Item
A
MAGENTA
YELLOW
D
E
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Cyan drum Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Magenta drum Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Yellow drum Black drum)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
Set value
1 to 199
Default value
100
Writing
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
A:
100
1199
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5021
DIRECTION
A100
CYAN
B100
MAGENTA
C100
D 1
MULTICOUNT
YELLOW
EXECUTE
OK
50-22
Purpose
2)
: Adjustment
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality image position
Section
Item
: Image quality
PHASE:
The number assigned to the phase is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.
Display
REGIST (Auto
registration
adjustment is
executed.)
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
DLUM POS
(Auto phase
adjustment is
executed.)
PHASE
Content
Display
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
Default
value
100.0
100.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
100.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
18
100.0
Remark
Same item with SIM50-20
*
However, the adjustment
accuracy is in the unit of
0.1 dot. (The adjustment
accuracy of 50-20, -21 is
in the unit of 1.0dot.)
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
2
Compulsory
end error
Basic error
Error
code
1
2
4
5
7
Error display
SUSPENDED
SUSPENDED
TONER EMPTY
TONER BEFORE
BEHAVIOR
SENSOR CALIBRATION
TIME OVER
PROCESS CONTROL
Error content
Detail of content
Calibration error
Time error
Process control error
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Sub scan
adjustment
error
Main scan
adjustment
error
Error
code
10
11
15
16
20
21
22
Error display
Error content
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
50
51
55
56
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
70
71
72
Detail of content
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
Error
code
73
Main scan
adjustment
error
Other error
Error display
Error content
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
85
86
87
88
99
OTHER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
MAIN R
105.0 (+0.2)
110.0 (-0.1)
103.0 (+0.4)
100.0 (+0.0)
99.0 (-0.2)
99.0 (+0.2)
98.0 (+0.3)
98.0 (+0.1)
105.0 (+0.0)
REGIST
DRUM POS
SUB
PHASE
4 (3)
ALL
EXECUTE
1/1
(Adjustment screen)
0
TEST
* Specify the color with [K], [C], [M], and [Y] buttons. (Depending on the selected kind of data, selection of a color button
cannot be made. In that case, the key entry is disabled.)
MAIN F
0
TEST
Detail of content
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
1)
EXECUTE
2)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
3)
EXECUTE
50-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
6)
7)
TEST
AUTO REGISTRATION
REG_EXE_CNT
REG_SUC_CNT 00000000
REG_CNT
9)
DATA DISPLAY
00000000
: FAX/Scanner
Item
: Image quality
1/1
1)
2)
NEXT
Operation/Procedure
BACK
: Adjustment
Section
Purpose
50-27
00000000
CLOSE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
SCANNER
mode (FAX,
other than
COPY)
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE1
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE2
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE1
Image loss
setting
SPFSIDE2
Display item
LEAD_EDGE (OC)
FRONT_REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
FRONT_REAR(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
Description
OC lead edge image loss setting
OC side image loss setting
OC rear edge image loss setting
Front surface lead edge image loss setting
Front surface side image loss setting
Front surface rear edge image loss setting
Back surface lead edge image loss setting
Back surface side image loss setting
Back surface rear edge image loss setting
OC lead edge image loss setting
OC side image loss setting
OC rear edge image loss setting
Front surface lead edge image loss setting
Front surface side image loss setting
Front surface rear edge image loss setting
Back surface lead edge image loss setting
Back surface side image loss setting
Back surface rear edge image loss setting
* A to I: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. 1step=0.1mm
Set range
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
Default value
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
Adjustment item
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5027
TEST
Engine
BK main scan
magnification ratio
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
A:
30
100
FAX
MFT
30
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
20
FRONT_REAR(OC)
20
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
30
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
CS1
CS2
OK
SCANNER
ADU
50-28
CS3
Purpose
: Adjustment
CS4
Item
: Image quality
LCC
OC ADJ
2)
* The operating procedures and the display shift for each adjustment and the display, refer to the next page.
<List of adjustment items>
BK-MAG
ADJ
OC adjustment
SETUP/
PRINT ADJ
Print position
adjustment
RESULT
Result display
DATA
Data display
Description
OC document lead edge,
off-center, and sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
BK main scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
RSPF (front/back)
document lead edge, offcenter, sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
Print lead edge adjustment,
all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU)
adjustment
Display of the adjustment
result
Display of data used for the
adjustment
Adjustment item
OC
RSPF
SIDE1
(front)
SIDE2
(back)
DATA
1/1
50-28
: Adjustment
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [OC ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, the
screen shown on the right side is displayed.
2)
3)
4)
Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC with the corner reference, and cover the black background chart over the OC
adjustment pattern.
* Set the adjustment pattern in traversal position (A4). Check
to confirm that there is no clearance with the document
guide.
Adjustment
menu
OC ADJ
SPF ADJ
(RSPF)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
Scanner
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
Purpose
Content
BK main scan
magnification ratio
correction
SPF adjustment
SPF ADJ
CLOSE
1)
Menu
display item
OC ADJ
SETUP/PRINT
ADJ
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
Operation/Procedure
NO.
Adjustment
menu
BK-MAG ADJ
* Kind and size of black background charts made with a cutting sheet equivalent to 310 x 470 cutting sheet No. 791
(Black).
5)
<Adjustment item>
<Adjustment item>
7)
6)
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
CS1
MFT
CS2
EXECUTE
CS2
EXECUTE
1/1
50-28
Purpose
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation)
(2: BK-main scan magnification ratio correction))
Section
Item
: Image quality
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern (print position adjustment
pattern) is started.
1)
2)
Select an item to be adjusted. The display is shifted to the cassette select screen for printing the SPF adjustment pattern.
3)
4)
CS1
1/1
50-28
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
* During scanning of the main scan magnification ratio correction pattern and calculating the magnification ratio adjustment value
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value is started.
6)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjustment pattern (front surface).
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (front surface) and calculating
After completion of scanning the front surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (front surface) is started.
After completion of calculation of the front surface adjustment value, the display is shifted to the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface) scan start screen.
<Adjustment item>
Section
Item
: Image quality
8)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface).
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface)
After completion of scanning the back surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (back surface) is started.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
* During self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern
(CS3)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (4: Print position adjustment)
7)
50-28
Purpose
6)
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
* When two or more cassettes are selected, scanning and calculation are repeated for the number of output sheets (3 to
max.7).
Content
SPF adjustment front surface
SPF adjustment back surface
SPF adjustment front/back surface
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
SIDE1
SIDE2
ALL
1/1
Content
Print lead edge adjustment
Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge, print of-center adjustment
OC
SPFSIDE1
SPFSIDE2
BK-MAG
BK:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
LEAD
50-28
OFFSET
Purpose
ALL
1/1
50-28
Purpose
1/2
BACK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
: Adjustment
Item
: Image quality
Section
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
: Adjustment
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [PRINT] button is pressed, the data used for the print
position adjustment are displayed.
2)
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
1 to 99 ( 99)
STEP
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
1 to 99 ( 99)
STEP
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
Times
Error code
ADJ_SPF1
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
ADJ_SPF2
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
Status (4)
ADJ_OC
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
SPF2 (3)
STEP
Display content
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
SPF1 (2)
Item display
PAPER (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
COUNT (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
ERROR
Unit
Adjustment item
(page)
BK-MAG
Item display
Display content
ADJ (BK-MAG)/PAPER/
COUNT
BK-MAG
SCAN_MAG (SUB, MAIN)
BK-MAG data
BK-MAG scan magnification ratio
correction value
Error history
PRINT adjustment value,
correction value
ERROR
ADJ_MFT (LEAD/OFST)
LEAD (F/C/R)
OFFSET R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
ERROR
Unit
ADJ STEP
PAPER: COUNT: Times
mm
SUB:MAIN:-4.99
to +4.99
Error code
LEAD, OFST: mm
PAPER:
COUNT: Times
mm
mm
Error code
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is decreased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is advanced.
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is increased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is delayed.
ADJ_OC
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
OCSPF
r4.99
BK-MAG
TEST
PRINT
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5101
A:
40
51
A 40
TC2
B 60
TC2 OFF
ON
TIMING
TIMING
99
OK
51-1
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Process
Item
: Operation (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
: Paper transport
Item
: Operation
1)
3)
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
51-2
Purpose
Display item
TC2 ON TIMING
Description of
content
Secondary transfer
voltage ON timing
setting
Secondary transfer
voltage OFF timing
setting
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
40
60
Operation/Procedure
Select a category to be set. (In this example, [SIDE1] is
selected.)
* Select a category, and the selected button is highlighted.
The set item of the selected category button is displayed.
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
On the initial display, [SIDE1] is selected.
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Button
SIDE1
Display item
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL__THIN LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
SIDE2
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2
ENGIN
TRAY1(S)
TRAY1(L)
TRAY2(S)
TRAY2(L)
I
J
MANUAL OHP1
MANUAL ENV
DESK(S)
DESK(L)
A4LCC
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
25
1 to 99
25
1 to 99
1 to 99
40
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
25
1 to 99
25
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
Transport direction
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.5102
REGIST
ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
A:
50
1
99
SIDE1
CLOSE
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
50
NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
50
NORMAL_THIN_LOW
SIDE2
ENGIN
OK
53-7
53
Purpose
53-6
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray
size volume maximum value adjustment is started.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set the tray document guide to A4R (11 x 8.5R) width position
and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started.
2)
3)
Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume minimum value according to the above procedures.
3)
4)
Display
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Content
Tray size volume maximum value
Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment
Tray size volume minimum value
1
2
3
INCHI
series
Code in the
figure below
A/D value,
code in
the figure
below
Maximum
position
Middle
position (L)
Middle
position
(S)
Minimum
position
303.3
303.3
WIDTH_MAX
AD_MAX
215,9
WITH_P1
AD_P1
148.5
139.7
WITH_P2
AD_P2
118
118
WITH_MIN
Maximum position
Middle position (L)
Middle position (S)
Minimum position
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
Default
value
791
713
456
66
0
CLOSE
A:
791
[ 0~ 1023 ]
A 791
AD_MAX
B 456
AD_P1
C 713
AD_P2
D 791
AD_MIN
OK
Remark
53-8
Purpose
210
Set range
SIMULATION NO.53-07
TEST
* A/D is 10 bit.
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM.
Guide plate
position
Display
item
AD_MAX
AD_P1
AD_P2
AD_MIN
A4R OR
LTR
A5R OR
INVR
: Adjustment
: RSPF
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
AD_MIN
1)
2)
0
TEST
SPF
SIMULATION NO.5306
TRAY
ADJUSTMENT
TRAYVOLMAX
PRESS
CLOSE
TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE] TO START
EXECUTE
Display item
ADJUST VALUE
Description
SPF scan position
adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
TEST
2)
A:
ADJUST VALUE
[1] [0]
50
[
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
[0] [1]
1~ 99 ]
5)
55
0
TEST
55-1
SCANNER
Purpose
: Setting
: PCU
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
SOFT
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
AAA
DATA
12345678
12345678
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-02
(SW No.1-16)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
4)
EXECUTE
55-3
Purpose
: MFP
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
[1] [0]
[0] [1]
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
5)
[1] [0]
ENGINE SOFT
SW.
[0] [1]
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-01
SETTING
SW NO.
AAA
DATA
12345678
12345678
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
0
TEST
: Setting
5)
(SW No.1-16)
EXECUTE
0
TEST
MFP SOFT
55-2
Purpose
: Setting
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
AAA
DATA
12345678
12345678
: Scanner
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-03
(SW No.1-16)
EXECUTE
56
56-2
Purpose
: Backup
Function (Purpose) : Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of EEPROM,
SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to
restore the data.
Section
: MFP
Section
: Memory, HDD
Item
: Data transfer
Item
: Data
56-1
Purpose
: Data transfer
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
"HDD IMPORT"
* Display during exporting
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
"HDD EXPORT"
5)
HDD SRAM
Content
All memory contents are transferred to HDD.
The contents of HDD are transferred to all the
memories.
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Transfer from SRAM to HDD.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
Transfer from HDD to SRAM.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX)* is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
EEPROM HDD
HDD EEPROM
SRAM HDD
0
TEST
EXPORT/IMPORT
HDD
FILING
EEPROM&SRAM
0
COPY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56-01
DATA
ALL HDD
ENABLE
HDD ALL
DISABLE
EEPROM HDD
DISABLE
HDD EEPROM
DISABLE
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
DATA
EXPORT
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5602
1/2
EXPORT
HDD
IMPORT
EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
<SLOT descriptions>
60
SLOT
SLOT1
60-1
: Operation test/Check
SLOT2
SLOT3
Purpose
SLOT4
Descriptions
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Since it is of only the system area, it is excluded from the targets
of Red/Write check.
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Read/Write check is executed for some memory area.
Option memory connected to the ICU-ASIC.
Since SLOT4 (standard) memory is not installed, Read/Write
check cannot be executed.
Standard memory connected to the ICU-ASIC
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check ICU (memory) operation.
Section
Item
: Operation
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6001
PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START
EXECUTE
2)
3)
4)
5)
Purpose
Section
Item
60-2
<Result display>
Result display
OK
NG
NG
(SDRAM IS NOT IN SLOT4)
NONE
Detail
Success
Fail
Fail: SLOT4 (standard) is unconnected
and SLOT3 (option) is connected.
Not installed (including DIMM trouble)
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Display
Content
DDR setting of onboard SPD
DDR setting after the following
B.
Set
range
0
1
Default
value
0
SETTING ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
SDRAM setting
change flag
NUMBER OF ROW
11BIT
12BIT
13BIT
0
1
2
NUMBER OF COLUMN
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
8BIT
9BIT
10BIT
11BIT
12BIT
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
Item
Display
Content
CAS LATENCY
L
J
K
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
9CLOCK
10CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
:
20CLOCK
CL=2
CL=2.5
CL=3
NONE
128MBYTE
256MBYTE
NON
1CHIP SELECT
2CHIP SELECT
CAS latency
Set
range
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
:
13
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
Default
value
2
<Error list>
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6002
SDRAM SETTING
A:
0
0
A 0
SETTING
B 2
NUMBER OF
ROW13BIT
C 2
COLUMN10BIT
D 1
TWR SETTING
Display
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: PG
Content
LSU check polygon mirror is
abnormal
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: K
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: CL
ENABLEDISABLE
NUMBER OF
VALUE3CLOCK
OK
61
TEST
LSU
SIMULATION NO.6101
CLOSE
TEST
PRESS[EXECUTE]
61-01
Purpose
Operation
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
TO
START
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Section
: LSU
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
EXECUTE
1/1
62
61-4
Purpose
: Adjustment
: LSU
Item
: Adjustment
62-1
Purpose
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
: MFP (HDD)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
TEST
Description of item
Set range
Default
value
Print quantity
Cassette Manual
select
feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
1 to 999
1 to 6 1
1
3 (CS2)
2
3
4
5
6
A:
PRINT)
A 1
MULTICOUNT
B 3
PAPERCS2
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-2
CLOSE
YOU
Purpose
Example: PAPER:CS1
SIMULATION NO.6104
FORMAT
ARE
TEST
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6201
: Operation test/Check
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 999
EXECUTE
OK
2)
62-6
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
HDD
R/W
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-02
TEST
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
TEST(PART)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
2)
62-3
Purpose
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
: Operation test/Check
Section
Content
Partial check
All areas check
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
SHORT S.T
ENABLE
EXTENDED S.T
DISABLE
0
TEST
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6203
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6206
EXECUTE
1/1
62-7
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
: MFP
Item
: Data
Operation/Procedure
R/W TEST(ALL)
1)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
2)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-07
TEST
SMART
ERROR
PRESS
LOG
[EXECUTE] TO
* During delete operation of the job log data [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
OUT
THE
EXECUTE
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
62-8
Purpose
: Data clear
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6210
JOB COMPLETE
DATA CLEAR(WITH
JOB
LOG
DATA)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
SURE?
YES
Purpose
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-08
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT
SYSTEM
EXECUTE
62-11
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
NO
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
AREA)
* If delete of the document filing data is not completed normally, "NG" is displayed.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-10
Purpose
: Data clear
* After completion of delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6211
2)
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-12
Purpose
: Data clear
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-13
TEST
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
ARE
1)
2)
Content
(0: YES,
1: NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1 (Disable)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.6212
CLOSE
CLOSE
A:
(0:YES 1:NO)
OK
: Data clear
Item
: Clear
: Scanner (Exposure)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected button is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
62-13
Section
EXECUTE
0 1
Purpose
NO
YES
63-1
Purpose
SURE?
63
YOU
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Display item
GAIN ODD
TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
Description
Gain adjustment value
(ODD)
Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
Offset value (ODD)
Offset value (EVEN)
Reference plat sampling
average value (ODD)
Reference plat sampling
average value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code (0, 1 to 4)
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
GAIN EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE EVEN
Remark
0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over the
loop number
2: STAGE2. The target
value is less than the
specified level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
Display item
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Description
Second and later scan,
RSPF white reference
level
Remark
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6301
TEST
3)
147
GAIN EVEN
143
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
0
1/3
: Adjustment
: Scanner
Item
: Operation
a)
Sampling setting
b)
Scan request
c)
d)
Sampling end
e)
f)
g)
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
TEST
SCANNER
COLOR
BALANCE
SCANNER
MOTOR
IS
AUTO
NOT
ADJUSUTMENT
READY
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6302
[EXECUTE]
1/1
SHADING EXECUTION
PRESS
EXECUTE
TO SHADING START
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
SCANNER COLOR
BALANCE
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
63-3
Purpose
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
: Adjustment
: Scanner (scan)
Item
Operation/Procedure
When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
selected color is displayed.
RESULT
1/1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
SCANNER COLOR
Section
1)
BALANCE
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
OC #1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55,
#10: 45,
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#14: 21,
#19:
#20:
5,
4,
#15: 18,
#22:
2,
#:16:15,
#:24:
#17: 10,
#18:
8,
OC
1/2
* The sampling value of each patch from the high density side
is displayed as the result.
63-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Scanner
Item
: Clear
Only one color button can be selected. (In the initial screen,
[K] is selected.)
* After completion of sampling, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1)
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
SET
THE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6306
BALANCE
CHART
ON
CHART
PLATEN
READING
AND
TOUCH
[EXECUTE]
* When the selected button is pressed again, selection is canceled and the button returns to the normal display.
* If no button is selected for standard reset, [EXECUTE] button grays out.
EXECUTE
63-7
Purpose
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
* During the scanner color balance standard value reset, [EXECUTE] and [YES] buttons are highlighted.
* After completion of the scanner color balance standard value
reset delete, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display
and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
1
2
SIDE A
(OC)
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6305
STANDARD SCANNER
GAMMA SETUP
SIDE AOC
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
63-6
Purpose
Item
0
TEST
3)
4)
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Setting
0
#B:
#G:
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6307
TEST
SCANNER
OF
COLOR
CALIB
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#E:
SETUP:SERVICE
#H:
#M: 195950,
5822,
#F:
Item
Target value table select
8600
#K: 151198
Set
value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Content
DEF1 mode setting
DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 mode setting
1/1
SETUP
Default
value
DEF1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6311
TEST
63-8
TARGET
Purpose
TBL
DEF1
DEF2
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
DEF3
: Setting
1/1
64
64-1
Purpose
The standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner target value is executed. [YES] button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6308
STANDARD
SCANNER
TARGET
: Operation test/Check
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
SETTING:SERVICE
3)
4)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
63-11
Purpose
: Setting
: Scanner (Scanning)
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Display item
PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19)
Description of item
Print pattern specification
(* For details, refer to the following.)
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
Exposure mode
specifications
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Cassette select
No process (Through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Select
Not select
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the other, manual feed only.
* Items F, G, H, I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to 11,
and 14 to 19 can
be printed.)
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
1 to 255
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
0 to 255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than above:
1 to 255
1 to 999
1
Pattern 14 to
19: 2 to 8
2
Other than
3
above: 1 to 8 4
5
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
Content
Grid pattern
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations:
sub scan
16 gradations:
main scan
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
Each color 10%
area (A4/4R)
density print
10
8-color band
print
11
4-color mesh
print
12
13
14
256 gradations:
sub scan
15
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
sub scan
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
main scan
16
Pattern
size
All
surface
Pattern
forming
section
LSU-ASIC
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
All
surface
Fixed
range
All
surface
(Each
color
1/4)
Sub
fixed
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
Color select
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
K only
{
{ (up to
3 colors)
{ (Up to
3 colors)
K only
K only
M parameter
N parameter
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Remark
254
{
No
K only
No
K only
(4color
fixed)
(4color
fixed)
10
(4color
fixed)
(4color
fixed)
Condition
When
NO
Each interval is
41.86MM(989dot)
When M is outside 1
to 13%, it is
rounded.
[K] print is started at
17mm from the
paper lead edge.
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
(For
through/
default,
C only.)
No
IMG-ASIC
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
NO.
Pattern
size
Content
17
All background
(Half tone)
All
surface
18
256-gradation
pattern (Other
dither)
256-gradation
pattern (Dither
for text)
Fixed
range
4-color grid
pattern (Cross):
main/sub scan
All
surface
19
20
Pattern
forming
section
Color select
When
NO
Condition
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
Fixed
range
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
M parameter
Enable/
Disable
N parameter
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
(up to
3 colors)
K only
No
(4color
fixed)
Controller
(memory)
Remark
Default
value
117
<Description of item>
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-01
A
B
A:
1
1
20
A 1
B 1
DOT1 (DOT1>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
C254
DOT2 (DOT2>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
D255
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
EXECUTE
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Content
Print quantity
0 The half tone
process control
correction value is
added.
1 The half tone
process control
correction value is
not added.
YES
NO
1 to 999
0 to 1
1
1
Example:PROC ADJ:NO
0
TEST
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6402
ENGINE COLOR
BALANCE
PATCH PRINT
MODE
A 1
COPIES
B 1
PROC ADJ:NO
1999
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Default
value
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
2)
Set
range
* When PROC ADJ is set to YES, the pattern with the half tone
process control correction value added is printed after execution
of high density process control.
Operation/Procedure
1)
COPIES
PROC ADJ
OK
64-2
Purpose
Item
EXECUTE
64-3
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
1)
OK
Operation/Procedure
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
<Description of item>
Item
A
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
No process (Through)
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH Exposure
mode specification
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Selected
Not selected
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to
11, and 14 to
19 can be
printed.)
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 1 to
255
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 0 to
255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than
above: 1 to
255
1 to 999
Pattern
1
14 to 19:
2 to 8
2
Other
3
than
4
above: 1
5
to 8
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed and paper exit conditions is selected, printing cannot be executed.
Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual. For the other, manual feed only.
Items F, G, H and I are as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
Content
Pattern
size
Pattern
forming
section
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
LSU-ASIC
M parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
1
N parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
254
Remark
Grid pattern
All surface
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations: sub
scan
16 gradations: main
scan
All surface
Sub fixed
{
No
Main fixed
No
All surface
All surface
Fixing
range
10
Fixing
range
All surface
(Each color
1/4)
5
6
7
Each interval is
41.86mm(989dot)
When M is other than 1 to
13%, it is rounded.
K print is started at 17mm
from the paper lead edge.
10
11
12
13
14
Sub fixed
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
No
15
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): sub scan
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): main
scan
All background (Half
tone)
Sub fixed
IMG-ASIC
No
No
No
No
16
17
18
19
20
Main fixed
All surface
Fixing
range
Fixing
range
All surface
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
Controller
(Memory)
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-03
TEST
SELF PRINT(BW)
A:
1 2 0
PRINT PATTERN
DOT1
C254
DOT2
D255
DENSITY
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
OK
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
64-4
Purpose
: Printer
Item
: Operation
3)
4)
: Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure
1)
F
G
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
Print gradation specification
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Set range
1 to 5
1 to 255
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 2
0
1
2
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 2
1
2
Default value
3
128
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
2 (CALIB)
* When print pattern 2 or 5 is selected, items E to G cannot be selected. (Though entry of the value is possible, it is not reflected to setting.)
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the
other, manual feed only.
* Items D, E, F, G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print in item A>
Condition
Color select
When NOT
K only
K only
K only
Gradation
select/ Dither
select
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1 to 255
K only
1 to 255
NO.
Content
Remark
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
4 pages are continuously printed in the sequence of Y only, M
only, C only, and K only.
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y/ C & M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6404
TEST
A:
3
1
A 3
PRINT PATTERN
B128
DENSITY
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPER
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
EXECUTE
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
: Operation test/Check
Section
OK
64-5
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
F
G
H
I
Description of item
Print pattern specification (*For details, refer to below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Picture
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering indent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Toner save mode
Setting
No setting
Set range
1 to 3
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
Default value
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
1 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation is disabled. (Though
entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>
NO.
1
2
Content
PCL process inspection pattern
(COLOR)
PCL process inspection pattern
(B/W)
Color select
Condition
No
K only
Gradation
select
Dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
Remark
NO.
3
Gradation
select
Dither select
2:Calibration
Color select
Content
PCL process inspection pattern
(COLOR/B/W continuous)
Condition
No
Remark
Continuous printing is made at the default setting in the sequence of
COLOR and B/W. B/W printing is made at the B/W mode process speed.
2)
* The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6405
TEST
A:
3
1
A 3
PRINT PATTERN
B 2
DITHER CALIB
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPERCS1
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
EXECUTE
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
: Operation test/Check
Section
OK
64-6
Purpose
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
<Set item description>
Item
A
DITHER
C
D
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
HALFTONE
BIT DEPTH
INTENT
GRAY COMPENSATION
INK SIMULATION
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
PHOTO
TEXT/GRAPHICS
CAD
1BIT
4BIT
SHARP COLOR
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
K
KCMY
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to
below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering intent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Ink simulation
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Set range
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 3
Default value
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
0 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation/ ink simulation is disabled. (Though entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
Content
Color select
Condition
When NO
Gradation select
dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
K only
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6406
Remark
65-2
Purpose
A:
1
1
A 1
PRINT PATTERN
B 2
DITHER CALIB
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPERCS1
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position adjustment
result.
COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
65
2)
65-1
Purpose
The coordinates of the currently touched position are displayed in real time.
: Adjustment
* X-coordinates (horizontal direction) and Y-coordinates (vertical direction) are displayed in decimal numbers.
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Adjustment
* As far as the touch panel is properly adjusted, the range of coordinates in the LCD display range is:
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When you take your finger off the touch panel, the last display value is displayed. (It does not return to "0.")
40
20
40
X 0
40
Y 0
600
70
20
120
40
220
320
120
420
520
620
170
200
220
200
600
67
67-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
: Printer
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
6)
EXECUTE
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER
ENGINE
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PLEASE WAIT.
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 completion screen. The reference value registration
process 2 (Black) is automatically started.
NOW
REGISTERING
THE
NEW
TARGET
OF
HALFTONE
PROCON.
EXECUTE
TEST
PRINTER
ENGINE
COMPLETED
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
THIS
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PROCEDURE.
67-25
[Initial Screen]
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
: Adjustment
Section
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
PLEASE WAIT.
EXECUTE
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
User request
Cyan-rich
Magenta-rich
Yellowish
Reddish
Greenish
Blueish
Black
Cyan
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
Magenta
decrease
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
decrease
Yellow
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
(increase)
decrease
Item content
Target value
table setting
Set value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Target setting
Standard adjustment setting (Default)
5% reduced red setting (Color balance with
slightly strong Cyan)
10% reduced red setting (Color balance with
emphasis on Cyan)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-26
TARGET TBL
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Item name
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
1/1
67-27
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Purpose
Section
: Printer
Item
: Registration
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
A:
50
1 99
A 50
POINT1
B 50
POINT2
C 50
POINT3
D 50
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
: Printer
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
1 3)
After completion of sampling, the display is shifted to the sampling result display screen. Press [REPEAT] button to return to
the sampling start screen.
4)
5)
The display returns to the initial screen, and the registered target value is displayed.
67-26
Purpose
Press [SETUP] button, and the display is shifted to the sampling start screen.
Place the 16-patch pattern printed with SIM67-25 on the glass
table and press [EXECUTE] button.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
0
TEST
: Adjustment
Display data
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
0
SCANNER
#B:
TARGET
91,
OF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#E:
5822,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#F:
SETUPSERVICE
8600
A 1
#G:
28935,
#L: 169731,
#M: 195950,
#K: 151198
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION 6730
TEST
(0:YES
1:NO)
1
0
1/1
SETUP
OK
67-28
Purpose
67-31
: Adjustment
Purpose
Section
: Printer
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Clear
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6728
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
: Data clear
* After completion of calibration value clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
<Clear item>
Clear item
1
0
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-31
67-30
Purpose
: Setting
: Printer
Item
: Setting
Display
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
Delivery of
calibration data is
inhibited.
Delivery of
calibration data is
allowed.
EXECUTE
: Setting
Section
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set
range
0 to 1
NO
2)
YES
67-32
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default
value
1
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
67-33
Purpose
Display
Content
SCREEN
(0:YES 1:NO)
1
B
COLOR
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
0 to 1
Default
value
0
(YES)
Section
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
(YES)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-32
TEST
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MODE
A:
A :0
SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
B:0
COLOR(0:YES
: Adjustment
1:NO)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
2)
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Description
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
SCREEN1 9
(KCMY)
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Content
4bit_LOW (Photo)
4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
1bit_LOW (Photo)
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
4bit_CAD
Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Toner save 1bit_LOW (Photo)
Toner save 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
Toner save Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Toner save Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Default value
SCREEN10, 11
(K)
K
127
125
124
124
122
120
114
105
95
82
70
64
57
62
75
128
128
127
127
127
127
123
119
111
112
106
110
120
110
110
SCREEN4
C
M
128
128
128
128
127
128
128
128
127
126
126
127
124
124
122
122
116
117
113
112
108
115
113
110
112
117
119
120
119
121
Y
128
127
127
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
(*): When SCREEN6/SCREEN7/SCREEN10/SCREEN11 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] button is pressed, the grayout keys are disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
A:
128
0 255
A128
POINT1
B128
POINT2
C128
POINT3
D128
POINT4
SCREEN
OK
67-33
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Description
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
SCREEN13
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Content
1bit Photo
1bit Graphic
1bit Mono (*)
(*): When SCREEN3 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y]
button is pressed, the gray-out keys are disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
A:
128
0 255
A128
POINT1
B128
POINT2
C128
POINT3
D128
POINT4
SCREEN
OK
K
128
128
127
127
127
127
123
119
111
112
106
110
120
110
110
Default value
SCREEN2
C
M
128
128
128
128
127
128
128
128
127
126
126
127
124
124
122
122
116
117
113
112
108
115
113
110
112
117
119
120
119
121
Y
128
127
127
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
MX2700N
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
1. Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
1)
2)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
3)
4)
User
Serviceman
Class 2
Other
Warning
Trouble
Other
Warning
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot the cause.
Repair
Reset
Standby state
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime.
YES
Replace or supply
the consumable part.
NO
D. Breakdown sequence
(1)
Kind of trouble
FAX board trouble (1 line)
FAX board trouble (2
lines)
HDD trouble
SCU communication
trouble
PCU communication
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall
Controller fan motor
trouble
Connection trouble (ICU
detection)
Serial number
discrepancy
Memory error (included
not installed the expansion
RAM)
HDD registration data sum
error
Image memory trouble,
decode error
Network error
Judgment
block
ICU
Trouble code
F6
F7
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
{
{
Scan
push
{
{
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
{
{
U1
{
{
U1
FAX
print
List
print
U1
U1
{
{
{
{
Notification
to FAST
host
U1
U1
E7 (03)
E7 (80), A0-02
{
{
E7 (90), A0-01
L8-20
U1 (01)
L4-30
E7 (60 65),
A0 (10 12, 20)
U2 (30)
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
F2 (80 87)
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
*7
*7
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
U2
U2
U2
F3-22
U2
U2
U2
U6-01
U2
U2
U2
U6-02
U2
U2
U2
U6 (09, 20 22,
51)
U6 (00, 10, 50)
U2
U2
U2
U8
U8
U8
F1 (10)
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
F1 (excluding 10)
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
{
{
*9
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
*6
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U8
*7
U3
*7
U3
*7
{
{
PCU
PCU
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Kind of trouble
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU color system
troubles
Document control trouble
EEPROM system
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading,
etc.)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (ICU
detection)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled,
Judgment
block
SCU
Trouble code
E7 (70, 75),
A0 (22)
UC (02)
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
FAX
print
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1, L3
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
MFP
PCU
F2 (91 94)
: Operation disabled
(2)
When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
MFP event
manager
Each block
(Power ON sequence)
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
E7
05
06
07
08
00
01
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
14
20
21
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
E7
28
29
50
55
60
61
62
65
70
75
80
90
EE
EC
EL
EU
F1
00
02
03
08
10
11
15
19
20
21
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F2
50
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
49
50
51
58
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
FAX
Supply
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
F2
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
92
93
94
F3
F6
12
22
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
F7
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
H2
00
01
02
03
H3
00
01
02
H4
00
01
02
H5
L1
L3
30
01
00
00
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Refer to FAX manual for details
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
L4
02
04
05
06
11
30
31
32
L6
10
L8
01
02
20
PC
-U1
01
U2
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
25
U6
UC
30
50
80
81
90
91
00
01
02
09
10
20
21
22
50
51
02
20
Remarks
Trouble
detection
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
PCU
LSUcnt
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
FAX
Supply
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-12
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-20
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-21
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-22
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-01
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-03
Trouble content
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-04
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-05
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Trouble content
Case 3
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-07
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-08
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Dirt on the memory pin
Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system memory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs. (Combination of system memory (slot 1, slot 2)
System memory
Slot2
Slot1
(Inside)
(Outside)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
No.
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
Operation guarantee
Hard
Soft
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
When turning
on the power
Since the
machine is not
booted, the
trouble display is
not made.
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
E7-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-03
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
E7-05
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Case 4
MFPcnt PWB trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 5
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2) Replace the memory.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
* Combination where local memory Slot 4 (inside) and Slot 3 (outside) operate normally (Refer to E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
E7-08
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-09
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Local memory
Slot 4
Slot 3
(Inside)
(Outside)
256MB
512MB
256MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
E7-10
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 4
Case 5
Soft
When turning
on the power
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
E7-21
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-28
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-29
E7-14
Trouble content
Case 3
Hard
Trouble content
E7-11
Operation guarantee
E7-20
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-50
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-65
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-70
Trouble content
E7-55
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-60
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-61
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-75
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-80
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Trouble content
Trouble content
E7-62
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-90
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Case 4
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
F1-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
F1-03
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-08
EE-EU Auto development adjustment trouble
(Under-toner abnormality)
Trouble content
F1-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-15
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-20
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-31
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
F1-33
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-34
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-35
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-21
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-19
F1-32
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-36
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-37
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-38
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-50
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-40
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-39
F2-39
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-40
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-41
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-42
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-43
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content
F2-45
Check
and
remedy
F2-49
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
F2-50
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Trouble content
F2-44
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-51
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-65
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
F2-66
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
F2-58
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-67
F2-64
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-70
Trouble content
Case 2
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-71
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-72
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
F2-76
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Trouble content
F2-74
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
F2-73
F2-75
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-77
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Case 2
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-78
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-82
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-83
Trouble content
F2-80
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-84
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
F2-81
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-85
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-86
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-87
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-92
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-93
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-94
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
F3-12
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F3-22
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H2-00
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-03
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-02
H3-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
H4-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-30
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H5-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
L1-00
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L3-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-04
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-05
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
L4-06
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 3
Trouble content
Case 2
Trouble content
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-30
Trouble content
1)
2)
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
L4-31
The primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Install the primary transfer belt.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
MFP
Fan motor trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-32
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L6-10
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
L8-01
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L8-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Trouble content
Case 2
L8-20
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
PC---
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U1-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-05
Battery trouble
Trouble content
Power unit trouble
Replace the power unit.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
index
U2-24
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-25
U2-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-22
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-23
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-30
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Trouble content
U2-50
Trouble content
Trouble content
Case 2
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error (Onetouch, group, program, etc.)
MFP
Write/read error to/from HDD
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents.
2) Since the registered contents have been deleted,
register them again.
3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the HDD.
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
U2-80
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-81
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-90
EEPROM trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the
trouble.
SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-91
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-00
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-09
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
U6-02
EEPROM trouble.
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Trouble content
U6-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-20
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-21
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-51
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
U6-50
Trouble content
U6-22
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
[9] MAINTENANCE
MX2700N
Service Manual
Unit name
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
Color supply
Drum
peripheral
Developing
section
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception seal
(BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception seal
(C)
Waste toner box
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R (C)
Toner filter
Toner cartridge (BK/
C/M/Y)
Bias pin/Connector
Unit name
LSU
Transfer
section
Part name
Color supply
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
400
K
500
K
120
K
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
300
K
60
K
Monochrome
supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
700
K
180
K
600
K
800
K
240
K
900
K
1100
K
300
K
1000
K
360
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Unit name
Transfer
section
Fusing
section
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Specified position
Separation roller
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Part name
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper heat roller
gear
Upper roller bearing
Lower roller bearing
Upper separation
pawl
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Non-contact
thermistor
Gears
Paper guides
Fusing unit
Ozone filter PA
Paper feed
section
Pickup roller
Drive
section
Torque limiter
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Gears (Grease)
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Others
Belts
Sensors
Image quality
Optical
section
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/
SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/
Drive wire
When
calling
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
100
K
Filters
Transport
section/
Paper exit
reverse
section
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Specified positions
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade
(BK)
Charging unit
(BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R
(BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
When
calling
Monochrome
supply
100
K
400
K
500
K
120
K
600
K
700
K
180
K
800
K
900
K
240
K
1000
K
1100
K
300
K
1200
K
360
K
300
K
60
K
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replacement consumable parts which are required for maintaining the performance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason] Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the
user's operation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Life end definition of a drum
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, the number of rotations specifies quality
assurance policy of the tandem engine, where its wear cannot be
solely defined by the number of sheets but other operating conditions including increased slip rotations depending on the ratio of B/
W to color and/or B/W printing in the color mode using the ACS.
The guaranteed number of rotations for the MX-2300/2700 series
drum is 715K.
The drum life is affected by the number of sheets of one print job.
This is because the actual life is determined by rotations of the
drum. If the number of sheets of one print job is less than 3 sheets,
the number of rotations for page is increased. As shown in the figure below, therefore, the number of sheets of drum life varies
depending on the number of sheets of one print job.
As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with
SIM22-1 from the accumulated number of rotations of each drum.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) - 550 (K rotations) / 715 (K rotations) x 100 = 030 (%)
Drum counter
B/W
Full color
100K
60K
Drum
* For 100% full color output by the user, the life of the black drum
is 60K similarly to the life of the color drums.
Drum Life
200
Black Drum
Drum Life ( - K pages)
150
Color Drum
100
50
0
0
B. LSU
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
1
2
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
C. Developing section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R
(C)
Toner filter
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Bias pin/
Connector
When
calling
100
K
300
K
60
K
400
K
500
K
120
K
600
K
700
K
180
K
800
K
900
K
240
K
1000
K
1100
K
300
K
1200
K
360
K
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
13
4,10
13
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
13
3,10
12
D. Transfer section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Intermediate
transfer belt
Primary transfer
roller
Intermediate
transfer blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt
drive roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
19
20
8
10
4
21
17
5
19
11
2
12
9
14
6
13
15
16
9 11
18
14
15
13,17
16
10
4,6
2,5
E. Fusing section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Specified position
(P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
12
6
1
9
7
8
3
4
7
11
11
8
5
11
F. Optical section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/
SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/
Drive wire
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Specified positions
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
G. Filters
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Ozone filter PA
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1 : Dec. 15 2005
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
2
3
J. Drive section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Gears (Grease)
Belts
HANARL FL955R/FLOIL
G313S
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
(specified positions).
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
(specified positions).
(FLOIL G313S)
(HANARL FL955R)
(1)
Code
Content
VK
VC
a. Maintenance counters
VM
Code
Content
TA
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
VY
(2)
TK2
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Code
Content
TA
AA
Enable
FK1
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
(3)
Code
Content
Waste toner full
DK
DC
DM
DY
Disable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
Disable
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Enable
CA
TK1
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
Enable
a. Maintenance counters
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
1 : Dec. 15 2005
C.
UpdateManual
procedures and kinds of firmware
Service
1. General
2)
3)
4)
1)
Firmware types
2)
3)
When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
4)
Machine
Flash ROM
ALL
ICU(BOOT)
Option
ICU(MAIN)
IMG-ASIC
SCU
PCU
FAX1
FAX2
1K FINISHER
INNER FINISHER
LCC A4
DESK
Contents
Includes all contents shown below.
ANIME
BOOTSUB
CONFIG
ESCP FONT
GRPH
LANG
SPDL
XIO FONT
PROFILE
MAIN
IMG DATA ROM
SCU(MAIN)
PCU(MAIN)
FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2(MAIN)
FINISHER_1K(MAIN)
FINISHER_INNER(MAIN)
LCC_A4(MAIN)
DESK(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using USB
Firmware.sfu
Controller
USB Cable
1
First you must install a USB print driver from the setup.exe
program in the MX-2300/2700 CD-ROM Disc 1
Create a folder on the root drive (usually C:\) of the PC. Name
the folder Pastel. Download the firmware (xxxx.sfu) and the
file2PRN program (File2PRN.exe) and place these files into the
pastel folder.
Click on the firmware icon and drag it onto the File2PRN icon
The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware
loading for a few minutes.
When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue, the
Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S ***
E"
USB Slave
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the imager
from booting up normally.
If this occurs, you can "rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
Rename the firmware file in the pastel folder to emupdate.sfu
Click on the emupdate.sfu icon and drag it onto the
File2PRN icon.
The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware loading for a few minutes.
When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue,
the Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S ***
E"
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
Firmware.
Firmware.
USB Host
Firmware.
USB Memory
Firmware.sfu
(1)
4)
1 First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive.
2)
0
FIRMWARE
0
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
FILE1
FILE2
FILE3
FILE4
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
01.00.00
NOW 09.00.00
: CURRENT
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
01.00.00
NOW 01.01.00
: CURRENT
ARE
YOU
SURE?
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
09.00.00
NO
YES
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
1/1
1/5
TEST
3)
UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
ALL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
NOW
09.00.00
NEXT
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
NOW
01.01.00
NEXT
09.00.00
ARE
ALL
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/5
NEXT UPDATED TO
0
TEST
CLOSE
1 6)
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
CURRENT
01.00.00
E
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
LANGUAGE
CURRENT 01.00.00
0
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(MAIN)
GRAPHIC
ALL
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
COMPLETE : PLEASE
POWER
OFF/ON
PLEASE TURN
MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
:
ARE YOU SURE?
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
ERROR : PLEASE
OFF/ON
PLEASE POWER
TURN MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
ICUM,PCU,SCU
Machine 1
10.36.112.83
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52
10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
1)
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
MX-2700N
3)
After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place, Firmware Update, now processing... appears.
4)
When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the
machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
5)
Close the browser and open again to display latest information. will be displayed.
POFM_R
OSM
FUM
TFD2
HPOS
POM
HL3_U
TH3_FU
TFD3
APPD2
MTOP2
TH/HUD_M
MPGS
MPFS
MTOP1
MPFD
PCSS
REGS_R
MPUC
MPLD1
RD I/F
PWB
PCS
REGS_F
MPED
MPWD
DSW_ADU
POD3
APPD1
RRM
1TURC
DVCRUM_K
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
PFM
CPFC
CPUC1
CLUM1
CPFM
CPUC2
CLUM2
DSW_R
DVTYP_K
TCS_K
DV_K UNIT
DL_K
DHPD_K
DM_K
TNM_K
MC
PNC
TONER_K UNIT
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
ADUM_L
2TC
1TUD_K
WTNM
1TC
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPED1
CLUD1
CPFD1
PAPER FEED 1
UNIT
CSS1
DVTYP_C
TCS_C
DV_C UNIT
DL_C
DVM_K
TNM_C
DVCRUM_C
TONER_C UNIT
CSPD2
CPED2
CLUD2
CPFD2
PAPER FEED 2
UNIT
CSS2
OZFM
DVTYP_M
TCS_M
DV_M UNIT
DL_M
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
TNM_M
DVCRUM_M
TONER_M UNIT
AC IN
HL
PWB
DVTYP_Y
TCS_Y
DV_Y UNIT
DL_Y
DVM_CL
TNM_Y
DVCRUM_Y
MSW
PSFM
TONER_Y UNIT
AC
PWB
DCPS
PCU
PWB
DRIVER SUB
PWB
DHSW
OPTION
WH
PWB
MFPC
PWB
HDD
DH1
HDDFM
LCC
DH_LCC
FAX 2
OPTION
MHPS
CCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
CARD
READER
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT
COINVENDER
DH_DESK
DESK
OPTION
MOTHER
PWB
SCN IN
PWB
DOCC
PWB
OPTION
If DOCC PWB is
used,replace it with
SCN IN PWB.
FAX 1
OPTION
There is a standards
setting model
Only Japan
SPRM
SPFM
SGS
LSUSS
CPUFM
FIN INNER
SCNC
PWB
RSPF
PWB
SPPD5
SPPD4
STMPS
OPTION
FIN 1K
OCSW
MIM
ORS_LED
PNC
SRRC
SPED
SCOV
SOCD
LSU CNT
PWB
LSU UNIT
DHS1
LVDS
PWB
OPE
PWB
PGM
LD_Y
PWB
LD_M
PWB
LD_C
PWB
LD_K
PWB
POWER SW
PWB
INVERTER
PWB
OPERATION UNIT
SPFC
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD1
OPTION
AUDITOR
OPTION
SPWS
SPLS2
SPLS1
BD_K
PWB
TH1_LSU
ORS_PD
LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
PPD2
PPD1
HL2_L
TH2_FU
PS UNIT
HL1_U
TH1_FU
FUSER UNIT
POFM_F
POD2
POD1
DELIVERY UNIT
DSW_F
OPTION
RSPF UNIT
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Block diagram
ATA
connector
IDE bus
IDE
ASIC
DDR bus 2
SYSAD bus
32bits width
DDR bus 1
64bits width
SYSTEM
ASIC
VIDEOIF
SCAN OUT IF
LSU IF
ICU
ASIC
SCAN IN IF
Patch
I2C(Ch.0)
USB
DEV
USB
HOST
LOCAL bus
(LSI bus)
I2C
PCU
SCN
FAX 1st
UART
FLASH
IF
ASIC
USB-H
IMG-A Bus
(Auto Color)
FLASH IF
IO
EXPAND
USB-D
EEPROM
2Kbits
Control
signals
OPE IF
FAX
2nd
UART
SDR
SDR
SDRAM
SRAM
Ether
MAC
MicroWire
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus)
RTC
72pinDIMM Socket
EEPROM
2Kbits
RIC
(RS232C)
IMG
ASIC
244/
245
Expansion
PCI connector
LAN
ICU-IMG IF
I2C (Ch.1)
VBUS
SW
LAN
JACK
EFI connector
PCI bus 1
Piano
SW
IMG-B Bus
(Image process)
IMG-C Bus
(Image process)
574
X5
EEPROM
256Kbits
LVDS
PCI bus 2
LVDSIC
385/386/047/048
SO-DIMM
DIMM2
SO-DIMM
DIMM1
DDR bus 3
64bits width
ENGINE IF
connector
UART
for Debug
SO-DIMM
DIMM3
SO-DIMM
DIMM4
DDR
SDRAMx2
CPU
RM7065C
RM7965
72pinDIMM Socket
FLASH
Mem.x2
RS232C
Transceiver
UART
72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket
Battery
X1
Xtal
19.6608MHz
UART
To
MFPC
Via
Mother
To
LSU
Via
Mother
UART
UART
UART
LCC
FINISHER
DESK
Optional
FW
DC Power
Supply
IC2
Spread
Spectrum
IC4
RESETIC
IC1
CPU
H8S/2373
IC7
DFF
LCX574
IC73
Analog
MUX
RD I/F PWB
Analog Input
HL control
HL_UM/LM/US
AnalogInput
DSW_ADU/ TFD3 /
MPLD/ MTOP1/MTOP2/ MPED
Sensor Input
THOPEN_UM/LM/US
Sensor Input
CRUM
CRUM_K/C/M/Y
HV
MC / TC un
Fuser unit
Sensor Input
PPD2
MUX
HC151
I2C Bus
IC9
PMC ASIC
IC71
D/A Conv
(TCS/REGS cont)
IC8
I/O ASIC
IC5
SRAM
(1Mbit)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
Flash Write Protect
IC27/IC30/IC31/IC37
MUX
HC151x5
CLOCK
DATABus[15:0]
AddressBus[20:0]
I2C Bus
IC6
EEPROM
(64kbit)
3-wired serial
PWM
MUX
HC151
Lift Up Motor
(CLUM1/CLUM2)
DC Motor
Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Syncronous Motor
DVSET (K/C/M/Y)
DRDET (K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
Sensor Input
PNC_K /
PNC_CL
Load output
Mechanical
Counter
(Optional)
Sensor Input
COIN VENDOR
(Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY
Drum Lamp
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
PS FAN (PSFM) /
Ozone FAN (OZFM) /
Pout FAN
(POFM_F/POFM_R)
CSS11-14 / CSS21-24
POD1
APPD1 / APPD2
Sensor Input
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVM_K)/
DV Motor CL (DVM_CL)
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
C. PCU PWB
RSPF Unit
RSPF FEED
MOTOR
MHPS
LAMP UN
SCANNER
MOTOR
PANEL PCB
INVERTER PCB
LCD
LVDS
PHOTO
SENSOR
LVDS Receiver
30bit
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
SCNcntPWB
LVDS
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
LVDS Receiver
4bit *2
LVDS Driver
30bit
With AFE&LVDS
CCD PCB
RGB10bit*3
CPU
H8S/2373
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
CLUTCH
STMP UN
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SRAM
1Mbit
/CS2
SCAN ASIC
/CS3
SDRAM BUS
SDRAM
128Mbit
EEPROM
32Kbit
I2C
FlashROM <Socket>
8Mbit
/CS0
(/CS0 RESERVE)
RGB8bit*3
XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
IO ASIC
/CS5
LVDS
RGB8bit*3
CPT ASIC
/CS4
LVDS Driver
28bit
LVDS
Original detection
(Light emitting)
Original detection
(Light receiving)
OCSW
AUDITOR
CARD READER
<Engine/Controller>
(MFP PCB)
Mother PCB
(DOCC PCB)
(Option)
SCN IN PCB
A[4:0]
I/O ASIC
PD65892GC103
DSR_LCC
DTR_LCC
RxD_LCC
TxD_LCC
DSR_DSK
DTR_DSK
RxD_DSK
TxD_DSK
DSR_FIN
DTR_FIN
RxD_FIN
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
PCU
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
LSU ASIC
PIC
CPU
H8/3687
CPU
H8/3684
FAX
(Option)
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
CPU
I/O M30843FWGP
TxD
RxD
SCK
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
CPU
SH7706
LCC
(Optional)
DESK
(Optional)
FINISHER
(Optional)
LSU
O.C
SCN Cnt
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
New
ASIC
P.D.
P.D.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)-
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)-
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)-
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
DSR_SCAN
D[15:8]
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
Mother
PIC
I/O ASIC
PD65892GC
P.D.
CPU
H8S/2320
A[4:0]
DTR_SCAN
TxD
RxD
TxD
RxD
CPU
H8S/2373
Schmit Inv.
TxD
RxD4
TxD4
RxD3
TxD3
RxD2
TxD_FIN
SCK_LSU
RSV_DAT
TRANS_DAT
PCU_DTR
PCU_DSR
nPCU_TxD
O.C.
I/O
D[15:8]
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD2
SCK1
RxD1
TxD1
I/O port
I/O port
RxD0
O.C.
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
RxD_SCAN
nPCU_RxD
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
TxD0
TxD
P.U
RxD
P.D.
TxD
P.U.
RxD
P.U.
I/O
P.U
RxD
P.D.
DOCC
(Optional)
O.C
O.C
O.C
P.U.
LVDS
P.U.
P.U.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
DSR_FAX(CS)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(CS)
DSR_FAX(D)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(D)
RxD_FAX(CS)
REQ_PIC
CLR_PIC
nRxD_PIC
nTxD_PIC
CTS_SCN
RTS_SCN
nRxD_SCN
nTxD_SCN
TxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(D)
TxD_FAX(D)
MFPC
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CTS[4]
RTS[4]
CTS[3]
RTS[3]
RxD[4]
TxD[4]
RxD[3]
TxD[3]
MFPC
I/F ASIC
REQ[PIC]
CLR[PIC]
RxD[PIC]
TxD[PIC]
CTS[2]
RTS[2]
RxD[2]
TxD[2]
RTS[1]
CTS[1]
TxD[1]
RxD[1]
E. Serial communication
WH-SW
AC IN
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
15A 250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
NO
NC
WH PWB
A1
no-mounting
VR3
OPTION
A2
5W
10W
DESK
10W
MAIN
UNIT
10W
SCN
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
MAIN UNIT
VR2
nomounting
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
L1
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
option
SSR1
2 GND
HLOUT_UM
12A/125V
F101
TD2
G
HL LOW
T2
T1
N/F
~
6
2 GND
FW
Generating
Circuit
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
INT24V1
Z101
F102
T1AH/250V
D101
AC PWB
+
-
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
HLOUT_LM
G
SSR3
2 GND
HLOUT_US
RY1
150C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
150C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
150C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
TD3
HL SUB
T2
T1
T8AH/250V
F103
T5AH/250V
WH-SW
AC IN
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
T10AH/250V
F2
T10AH/250V
F1
VR1
A1
RY1
NO
NC
WH PWB
A1
no-mounting
VR3
OPTION
A2
5W
10W
DESK
10W
MAIN
UNIT
10W
SCN
F4
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
MAIN UNIT
VR2
WH-N
T2.0AH/250V
nomounting
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
F3
T2.0AH/250V
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
L1
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
SSR1
2 GND
HLOUT_UM
T6.3AH/250V
F101
TD2
HL LOW
T2
T1
N/F
~
6
2 GND
FW
Generating
Circuit
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
INT24V1
Z101
F102
T1AH/250V
D101
no-mounting
+
-
AC PWB
DC POWER SUPPLY
HLOUT_LM
TD3
HL SUB
T2
T1
T5AH/250V
F103
SSR3
2 GND
HLOUT_US
RY1
150C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
150C AC120V-15A.AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
150C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
F301
Voltage
Generation
T3.15AH/250V + 5Vo
+ 5VL
FUSE
FUSE
PSU
FUSE
F204
FUSE
F205
FUSE
F202
F203
F201
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
24V2
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
D-GND
D-GND
MFPC PWB
12V
5VL
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
5V_LD
24V2
P-GND
INT24V1
/INT_CNT
INT24V2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
5VN
MOTHER PWB
FET
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
LCC
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LD_C
LD_Y
option
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
DESK
D-GND
INT24V1
SCAN IN PWB or
DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
LD_M
INT24V1
FUM
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V2
RD I/F PWB
LSUSS_C
option
LSUSS_B
1stTC PWB
DVM_BK
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
PSM
DM_CL
ADULM
2ndTC PWB
D-GND
PFM
POM
5VO
PM
LD_BK
MC PWB
DVM_CL
PSFM
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
DM_BK
5VO
FINISHER
24V3
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
P-GND
INT24V2
5VNPD
P-GND
5VN
INT24V1
INT24V2
P-GND
VN
P-GND
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LSU
PWB
TEL
LIU
PWB
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
3.3V
5VS
5V
D-GND
A-GND
5V_LD
24V5
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
FAX
MAIN
PWB
FDSW
RDSW
OSM
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
HDD
12V
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
5V_LD
AC PWB
PCU PWB
24V1
24V2
5VNPD
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
SCAN CNT
PWB
INT24V1
5VN
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
24V1
24V
P-GND
A12V
A5V
A3.3V
D-GND
KEY OP
PWB
ORS PD
PWB
option
CARD READER
ORS LED
PWB
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CCD PWB
5VN
D-GND
N_HL(SUB)
N_HL(LOW)
N_HL(MAIN)
HL PWB
HL_PR
24V_EXT
P-GND
3.3V_EXT
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
CL
LVDS
PWB
HL(MAIN)
option
RSPF UN
24V
P-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HL(LOW)
INVERTOR
PWB
LCD PWB
HL(SUB)
WH-L
WH-N
1
3
2
4
1
5
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN4
WH-N(DESK2)
WH-L(DESK2)
WH-N(LCC)
WH-L(LCC)
CN3
WH-N(DESK1)
1
WH-L(DESK1)
3
B2P3-VH
B2P3VH-BL
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
WH PWB
B2P3-VH-R
CN1
1
3
CN5
D-GND
1
24V2
3
B03B-PH-K-R
PS-187
L_WH
B03P-VL
CN1
1
3
PS-187
L_WH
(AC-WH harness
HL PWB
L_HL
N_HL
(AC-HL harness)
(AC CORD)
To P15
2
1
2
1
2
1
JPN:STANDARD
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
2
1
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
SCANNER UNIT
(AC-WH harness
2
1
2
1
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
D-GND
4
CN4(B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
N_DC
4
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
3
N_HL
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW-Lout
1
NC
2
MSW-Nout
3
CN3(B03P-VL-R)
MSW-Lin
3
NC
2
MSW-Nin
1
AC PWB
CN6(B2P3-VH-R)
1
N_WH
3
L_WH
CN1(B03P-VL)
1
L_IN
2
NC
3
N_IN
MSW-Nin
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
(AC-DC harness)
MSW-Nout
MSW-Lin
(MSW harness)
MSW-Lout
MSW
CN1(B2P3-VH-B)
3
L_DC
1
N_DC
CN2(B5P-VH-B)
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
3
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW
1
P-GND
4
P-GND
3
P-GND
2
P-GND
5
P-GND
7
P-GND
8
P-GND
6
CN8(B7P-VH-B)
24V1
2
24V2
3
24V1
1
24V3
4
24V4
6
24V3
5
24V5
7
PSU FAN
PSU
CN5(B04P-VH-B)
12V
2
12V
1
CN4(B6P-VH-B)
D-GND
5
5VN
1
5VN
2
5VN
4
5VN
3
D-GND
6
CN3(B03P-VH-B)
3.3V
1
3.3V
2
D-GND
3
CN6(B03B-PASK-1)
DCCNT1
1
DCCNT2
3
TO INSERTOR (P16)
TO LCC(P15)
To P2
TO INSERTOR (P16)
TO LCC (P15)
TO LCC (P15)
TO LCC (P15)
TO INSERTOR (P16)
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
3
PSFM_V
2
2
PSCF_LD
3
1
P-GND
To P2
NAME
5VL
5VO
5VN
24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
24V5
MFP
FAX
OTHER
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
LCC,DESK
FINISHER
CN26
PSFM_V
28
PSCF_LD
30
P-GND
26
B32B-PHDSS-B
3.3V
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
12V
FW
P-GND
P-GND
24V1
24V2
24V3
PCU PWB
B12B-XL
CN3
11
10
8
6
9
7
12
4
2
1
3
5
MOTHER PWB
CN19(B10P-VH)
6
3.3V
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
7
5VN
8
12V
10
P-GND
9
24V3
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
CN20(B4P-PH-K-S)
3
n DCCNT1
4
n DCCNT2
1
2
1
2
FRONT
PNC(BLACK)
24V3
/PNC
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
CN8
24V2
B7P-VH-B
P
1
2
PSU
OPTION
1
2
TNM
1TNFD
D-GND
1TNFD
DSW-F
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
DSW-R
24V1
DSW_R(24V)
CN1
1
2
R
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
/LED3
/LED2
/LED1
KEY6
KEY5
KEY4
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
OP_SET
D-GND
5VN
5VN
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDD3
LCDD2
LCDD1
LCDD0
LCD_E
/OP_RW
LCD_CS
PRINTER OP PWB
AC PWB
1
2
7
8
5
6
R
3
4
P
1
2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V1in
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
CN8
NC(24V3)
NC(/PNC_C)
24V3
/PNC
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
SM18PIN
1TNFD
D-GND
EL2P
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
(PRT OP FFC)
6
7
1
2
3
5
1
2
7
8
5
6
P
3
4
R
1
2
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
1TNFD
D-GND
24V2
CN2
5
INT24V2
6
P-GND
INT24V1in
4
7
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
B12B-XL
CN3
3
CN13
31
NC(24V3)
32
NC(/PNC_C)
B32B-PHDSS-B
16
24V3
/PNC
15
B30B-PHDSS-B
17
18
CN9
1
2
DSW_R(24V)
3
DSW_F(24V)
4
B7P-VH-B
CN4
1
24V1
2
DSW_R(24V)
/LED3
24
/LED2
23
/LED1
22
KEY6
21
20
KEY5
19
KEY4
KEY3
18
17
KEY2
16
KEY1
15
OP_SET
14
D-GND
13
5VN
12
5VN
11
LCDD7
10
LCDD6
9
LCDD5
8
LCDD4
7
LCDD3
6
LCDD2
5
LCDD1
4
LCDD0
3
LCD_E
2
/OP_RW
1
LCD_CS
T24FAZ-SMT
CN8
PCU PWB
RTH(LOW)
RTH(SUB)
RTH(MAIN)
HL LOW
HL SUB
HL MAIN
THERMOSTAT
2
1
4
3
2
3
1
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H +
BU03P-TR-P-H
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
5
6
9
1
2
3
4
6
3
5
2
4
1
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
Drawer RWZ
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(LOW)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(MAIN)
5
4
1
9
8
7
6
6
3
5
2
4
1
4
3
2
1
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
13
14
15
16
DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
SM18PIN
TH_UM_IN
R
12
CN4
INT24V1
D-GND
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_UM
/HL_PR
B6P-PH-K-S
16
26
D-GND
B30B-PHDSS-B
TH_LM_IN
CN9
25
TH_UM_IN
30 TH_UMCS_IN
27
TH_US_IN
29
6
5
3
4
2
1
15
HL PWB
14
13
P
12
CN3
1
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
3
N-HL(LOW)
2
B03P-VL-R
CN2
1
N-HL(MAIN)
2
L-HL(COM)
3
L-HL(COM)
B03P-VL-K
PCU PWB
CN34
/HL_PR
5
7
HLOUT_UM
9
HLOUT_US
11
HLOUT_LM
D-GND
3
INT24V1
1
B40B-PADSS-B
BS-M
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
MC-Y
MC-Y
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
1TUD_CL
(MC harness)
1st TC PWB
MC PWB
2nd TC
PWB
CN1
1
2
4
3
5
6
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
CN1
7
6
4
3
2
1
5
B7P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
1TC_YMC
1TC_K
MC_YMC
HV_REM
1TC_CL
B7P-PH-K-S
1TC_CL
HV_REM
MC_YMC
1TC_K
1TC_YMC
P-GND
INT24V2
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
MC-CMY
BS-Y
(SPRING)
GB-M
(SPRING)
(SPRING)
BS-Y
BS-M
(SPRING)
BS-C
GB-Y
BS-C
GB-M
(SPRING)
GB-C
(SPRING)
BS-K
GB-C
(SPRING)
BS-K
GB-Y
GB-K
(SPRING)
MC-K
CLR
2-TC
GB-K
(MC-BK harness)
MC-M
MC-M
1
2
3
MC-C
MC-K
2-TC
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
1TUD_K
2
3
1
2
3
1
INT24V2
1TUD_CL
2
1
D-GND
3
5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
AC PWB
CN34
2
4
6
8
10
12
CN9
11
1TUD_CL
13
GND
9
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN26
20
P-GND
21 /HV_DATA#
22
/HV_CLK#
23
/HV_LD1#
24
HV_REM#
B40B-PADSS-B
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
CN9
12
1TUD_K
14
D-GND
10
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
B3P-PH-K-S
CN9
1
1TUD_K
2
D-GND
1
3
5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
PCU PWB
D-GND
DHPD_CL
5VLED
DHPD_CL
1
2
3
TNM_K
TNM_M
D-GND
DHPD_K
5VLED
1
2
3
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
1TURC
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
DHPD_K
TNM_Y
TNM_C
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
1
24V3
2
1
2
/1TURC
9
10
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
PCU PWB
CRM_Y_DT#
6
CRM_Y_CK#
8
B10B-PHDSS-B
2
4
1
3
5
7
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
9
10
P
7
8
5
6
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
9
10
R
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
(CRUM harness)
6
2
1
3
4
5
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1
6
2
1
3
4
5
1
4
3
2
DHPD_CL
5VLED
D-GND
31
29
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
24V3
/1TURC
DHPD_K
5VLED
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
5
3
9
11
1
16
14
32
30
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
15
17
19
21
22
24
18
20
CN12
6
INT24V2
4
P-GND
10
/DVM_K_CK
12
/DVM_K_D
2
DVM_K_LD
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
3
1
D-GND
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_C_DT#
3
CRM_C_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
DMCL
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
1
2
3
4
5
6
DMBK
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
SM6
INT24V1
INT24V1
DMBKB//
DMBKB/
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
(PS motor)
PSM
INT24V1
PSMA/
PSMB/
PSMA//
PSMB//
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
B12B-PH-K-S
INT24V1
INT24V1
DMBKB//
DMBKB/
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
CN5
5
INT24V1
1
PSMA/
4
PSMB/
2
PSMA//
3
PSMB//
6
INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
3
6
4
1
5
2
CN1
12
11
9
10
7
8
DRIVER
SUB PWB
(BIAS harness B)
(BIAS harness B)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
BS-Y
(BIAS harness A)
YELLOW
(BIAS harness B)
DL_BK#
3
DL_C#
53254-0310
10
DL_C#
1
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
To P4
DL_M#
3
53254-0310
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
DL_M#
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
(SPRING)
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
To P4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
BS-M
(BIAS harness A)
10
3
24V3
24V3
5
8
5
4
TCS_C
6
6
7
TCS_C
D-GND
6
7
D-GND
7
5
8
TSG_C
8
6
5
TSG_C
1
D-GND
1
4
D-GND
7
2
DVTYP_C
8
DVTYP_C
2
3
2
3
DVSET_C
DVSET_C
9
3
4
5VN
4
10
1
5VN
C
QR/P8-8P
P
(SPRING)
To P4
BS-C
(BIAS harness A)
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND
9
D-GND
2
1
(BIAS harness B)
DL_BK#
3
53254-0310
8
24V3
3
5
5
24V3
6
4
7
TCS_K
6
TCS_K
6
D-GND
D-GND
5
7
7
6
8
8
5
TSG_BK
TSG_BK
1
D-GND
1
7
D-GND
4
2
2
DVTYP_K
3
DVTYP_K
8
3
3
2
DVSET_K
9
DVSET_K
5VN
4
4
5VN
10
1
C
QR/P8-8P
P
BS-K
(SPRING)
To P4
(BIAS harness A)
DL_C(Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
9
MAGENTA
CYAN
DV un
BLACK
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
D-GND
DL_Y#
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
DL_M#
D-GND
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
DL_C#
D-GND
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
DL_BK#
D-GND
B40B-PADSS-B
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
24
22
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
21
23
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
CN15
PCU PWB
POLYGON MOTOR
/BREAK
1
POLYCLK
2
/LOCK
3
/START
4
5
P-GND
24V1
6
LD PWB(MAGENTA)
10
D-GND
9
INT5V
8
/SH_M
7
/ENB_M
6
DT_M5
DT_M+
4
D-GND
3
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M
1
LD PWB(BLACK)
10
D-GND
9
INT5V
8
/SH_K
7
/ENB_K
6
DT_K5
DT_K+
4
D-GND
3
Vref_K
2
SK_K
1
n LDERR_K
BD PWB
5VN
1
D-GND
2
n BD
3
D-GND
4
B4P-PH-K-R
(LSU-LD harness)
(LSU-LD harness)
3
4
LD PWB(YELLOW)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_Y
8
/ENB_Y
7
DT_Y6
DT_Y+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_Y
3
LDCHK_Y
2
n LDERR_Y
1
LD PWB(CYAN)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_C
8
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_C
3
LDCHK_C
2
n LDERR_C
1
LSU TH1
LSUTH1
D-GND
(LSU-BD harness)
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
CN4
B6P-PH-K-S
6
/BREAK
5
POLYCLK
3
/LOCK
4
/START
2
P-GND
1
24V1
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
CN1
B34B-PHDSS-B
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
/SH_C
5
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
4
2
D-GND
8
Vref_C
10
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
9
CN2
B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
3
INT5V
1
/SH_K
5
/ENB_K
7
DT_K6
DT_K+
4
D-GND
2
Vref_K
8
SK_K
10
n LDERR_K
9
11
LSUTH2
12
D-GND
CN11 B7P-PH-K-S
4
5VN
3
D-GND
2
n BD
1
D-GND
6
LSUTH1
D-GND
5
LSU
PWB
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
LSUSS_C
1
3
P
OPTION
CN7
1
2
3
4
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
D-GND
7
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
8
n TRANS_RST
9
JOBEND_INT
10
LSUTH1
11
LSUTH2
12
13
VSYNC_K_N
14
VSYNC_K_P
15
VSYNC_C_P
16
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
17
VSYNC_M_P
18
19
VSYNC_Y_P
20
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN9
CH0_N
1
CH0_P
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
8
CH2_P
D-GND
9
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
CLCLK_P
12
13
CH3_N
14
CH3_P
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N 17
HSYNC_LSU_P 18
19
D-GND
20
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P 21
ECLK_LSU_N 22
S22B-PHDSS-B
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
S6B-XA
1
2
P
INT24V1
/LSUSS_B
SM2P
1
2
R
LSUSS_B
n TRANS_DATA
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
B6B-XA
CN10
1
INT24V1
4
/LSUSS_B
B5P-PH-K-S
CN21
26
INT24V1
24
/LSUSS_C
B26B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN14
1
CH0_N
CH0_P
2
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
CH1_N
6
CH1_P
7
CH2_N
8
CH2_P
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
11
CLCLK_N
12
CLCLK_P
13
CH3_N
14
CH3_P
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
17 HSYNC_LSU_N
18 HSYNC_LSU_P
19
D-GND
20
D-GND
21 ECLK_LSU_P
22 ECLK_LSU_N
B22B-PHDSS-B
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
MOTHER PWB
CS2
PAPER
FEED
UN
CS1
PAPER
FEED
UN
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
detection)
1
2
3
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
detection)
1
CSS1
D-GND
2
S4P-PH-K-S
installation detection)
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
detection)
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
detection)
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
2
3
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
CSPD2
5VNPD
1
2
3
quantity detection)
PHNR-9-H
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
quantity detection)
PHNR-12-H
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
D-GND
CLUD1
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
D-GND
DSW_C
5VN
DF1B-24p
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPWD11
CPWD12
CSS1
CSS2
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CPWD21
CPWD22
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
CN4
3
D-GND
20
5VN
1
D-GND
5VNPD
18
2
D-GND
19
5VNPD
4
D-GND
21
5VN
9
D-GND
26
5VNPD
D-GND
10
11
D-GND
27
5VNPD
28
5VNPD
29
5VNPD
30
5VNPD
12
D-GND
13
D-GND
14
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17
D-GND
7
D-GND
24
5VN
5
D-GND
22
5VNPD
6
D-GND
23
5VNPD
8
D-GND
25
5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN6
1
CPFD1
3
CLUD1
5
CPED1
7
DSW_C
9
CSPD1
21
CPWD11
23
CPWD12
11
CSS1
10
CSS2
13
CSS11
15
CSS12
17
CSS13
19
CSS14
12
CSS21
14
CSS22
16
CSS23
18
CSS24
2
CPFD2
4
CLUD2
6
CPED2
8
CSPD2
22
CPWD21
24
CPWD22
B24B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PCU
PWB
PSFM
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
1
2
3
4
5
6
CPFC2
CPFC1
CPFC
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
/CPFC
1
24V3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
/CPUC1
1
24V3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/CPUC2
2
24V3
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
/CPFC
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
/CLUM2
SM18P
INT24V2
P-GND
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R
1
2
3
4
5
CN1
PSFMA//
2
5
INT24V1
3
PSFMB//
1
PSFMA/
6
INT24V1
4
PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
CN9
3
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
11
/CPFC
10
24V3
13
/CPUC1
12
24V3
/CPUC2
15
24V3
14
7
P-GND
6
/CLUM1
P-GND
9
8
/CLUM2
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN17
5
P-GND
4
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
1
2
CPFM_LD
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
AC PWB
PCU PWB
PROCON SENSOR UN
PS UN
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
P
14
15
R
14
15
P
10
11
12
13
/PCSS
24V3
SM18P
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
DF11-6DP-SP1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
PROCON SENSOR UN
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
10
11
12
13
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
1
5
6
2
3
4
ADULM
(Process control
shutter solenoid)
PCSS
RESI SENSOR R
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
REGS_R
2
REGS_R_LED#
1
5
6
7
8
9
PROCON SENSOR
5VNPD
5
D-GND
4
PCS_K
3
PCS_CL
2
1
PCS_LED#
3
2
1
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H
6
D-GND
5
PPD1
5VNPD
4
1
2
3
4
PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN
RESI SENSOR F
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
2
REGS_F
1
REGS_F_LED#
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
25
20
22
28
21
19
18
23
27
26
24
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
B12B-PH-K-S
CN5
8
11
9
7
12
10
PCU
PWB
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PPD2
D-GND
32
30
17
/PCSS
16
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
PPD1
CN17
29
31
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
MPWD
3
2
1
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
1
2
3
MTOP1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
3
2
1
7
8
9
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
11
12
13
14
5VLED9
27
28
5VN
29
HUD_M
14
D-GND
31
TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
MTOP1
25
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
HPDET
10
8
9
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
APPD3
9
POD3
10
MPFD
11
16
5VNPD
MPWD
13
14
TH_M
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
2
3
5
4
7
6
4
5
DF11-6DP-SP2
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
(Manual feed gate solenoid)
MPGS
MPFD
/MPGS
24V3
D-GND
5VLED7
MPUC
P
1
2
P
1
2
24V3
2
/MPUC
1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
15
24V3
/MPGS
31
30
/MPFS
24V3
14
/MPUC
28
24V3
13
QR/P4 32PINS
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
21
6
10
7
23
8
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
21
6
10
7
23
8
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
6
4
2
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
5VLED9
10
4
3
2
1
MTOP1
MTOP2
5VLED13
22
24
8
7
MTOP2
5VLED13
5VN
MPWD
19
20
10
9
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
16
13
18
5VN
MPWD
5
6
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
6
5VLED10
10
11
12
7
8
9
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
FG
R
1
2
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
P-GND
/MPGS
/MPFS
/MPUC
14
11
32
16
17
19
18
5
4
6
MPFS
PCU PWB
24V3
3
B32B-PHDSS-B
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
9
8
10
13
12
15
1
2
CN26
7
/ADUGS
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
R
1
2
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
4
/MPGS
2
5
1
24V3
1
5VLED7
5
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
DF11-6DP-SP1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
3
APPD1
1
2
2
D-GND
1
5VLED5
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
3
DSW_ADU
2
3
D-GND
2
4
1
5VLED2
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
1
2
4
3
5
6
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
APPD1
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
DSW_ADU
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
POD3
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
FG
SM6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
DF11-8DP-SP2
3
2
1
4
DF11-4DP-SP1
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
1
2
3
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
OSM
R
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUMB//
FUMA//
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
1
2
3
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
5
7
3
1
6
8
2
4
5VNPD
HPOS
D-GND
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
POFM 2
POFM 1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
4
1
POFM_V
3
2
/POFM_CNT
2
P-GND
3
1
4
POFM_LD2
P
5
1
2
3
4
POD2
HPOS
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
14
15
16
17
12
SM-12p
FUMB//
FUMA//
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
TFD2
13
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
1
2
3
4
5
P
6
7
11
8
9
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN6
9
FUMB//
8
FUMA//
INT24V1
11
12
INT24V1
10
FUMB/
7
FUMA/
2
POMA//
5
INT24V1
3
POMB//
1
POMA/
6
INT24V1
4
POMB/
B12B-PH-K-S
POD1
14
D-GND
2
18
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
16
17
12
HPOS
POD2
TFD2
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
16
12
10
24
7
9
11
13
15
14
13
1
2
3
4
5
S
6
7
11
8
9
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PCU
PWB
CN18
1 SCANDATA02 SCANDATA0+
3
D-GND
4 SCANDATA15 SCANDATA1+
6
D-GND
7 SCANDATA28 SCANDATA2+
9
D-GND
10 OUT_SCANCLKOUT11 OUT_SCANCLKOUT+
12
D-GND
13 SCANDATA314 SCANDATA3+
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17 FLVPP_MFP
18
3.3V
19
RES_SCN
20
3.3V
21
D-GND
22
3.3V
D-GND
23
24
3.3V
25
D-GND
26
3.3V
27
5VN
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
D-GND
TX25-30P-12ST-H1E
CN14
1
12V
2 PWM_CPUFAN
3
D-GND
4 LOCK_CPUFAN
B4P-PH-K-S
CPU FAN
(Board to Board)
CN5
SCANDATA01
SCANDATA0+ 2
D-GND
3
SCANDATA14
SCANDATA1+ 5
D-GND
6
SCANDATA27
SCANDATA2+ 8
D-GND
9
OUT_SCANCLKOUT- 10
OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3- 13
SCANDATA3+ 14
D-GND
15
SCAN IN
D-GND
16
PWB
FLVPP_MFP 17
3.3V
18
or
RES_SCN
19
3.3V
20
DOCC
D-GND
21
PWB
3.3V
22
D-GND
23
3.3V
24
D-GND
25
3.3V
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
TX24-30R-12ST-H1
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
MOTHER
PWB
CN26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN2
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
11
RRM_B
12
/RRM_A
13
/RRM_B
14
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
17
PFM_B
18
/PFM_A
19
/PFM_B
20
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
ADUM_L_XA
23
ADUM_L_XB
24
/ADUM_L_C
25
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN3
INT24V1
1
2
P-GND
3
5VNPD
B3P-VH
D-GND
FWP_PCU
PCU_RES
/MPFC_RES
/Reserve_out3
PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR
D-GND
PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR
/FAX_LED
/POF
D-GND
LSU_RST
TRANS_RST
D-GND
SCK
TRANS_DAT
D-GND
RSV_DAT
JOBEND_INT
TH1_LSU
TH2_LSU
D-GND
D-GND
INT5V
INT5V
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
CN23
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
17
RRM_B
18
/RRM_A
19
/RRM_B
20
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
11
PFM_B
12
/PFM_A
13
/PFM_B
14
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
23 ADUM_L_XA
24 ADUM_L_XB
25 /ADUM_L_C
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN2
3
INT24V1
2
P-GND
1
5VNPD
B7P-VH
CN7
D-GND
28
FWP_PCU
27
PCU_RES
26
25 /MPFC_RES
24 /Reserve_out3
PCU_TXD
23
PCU_DTR
22
D-GND
21
20
PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR
19
/FAX_LED
18
/POF
17
D-GND
16
LSU_RST
15
14 TRANS_RST
D-GND
13
SCK
12
11 TRANS_DAT
D-GND
10
RSV_DAT
9
8 JOBEND_INT
7
TH1_LSU
6
TH2_LSU
5
D-GND
4
D-GND
3
INT5V
2
INT5V
1
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
PCU PWB
CN26
25
P-GND
0ZFM_V
27
/0ZFM_CNT
29
OZFM_LD
31
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN34
DRMCL_A
17
DRMCL_B
18
/DRMCL_A
19
/DRMCL_B
20
/DRMCL_CNT 21
/DRMBK_CNT 22
DRMBK_A
23
DRMBK_B
24
/DRMBK_A
25
/DRMBK_B
26
B40B-PADSS-B
CN4
5
INT24V1
6
P-GND
7
5VN
B7P-VH
3
1
2
4
P
P-GND
0ZFM_V
/0ZFM_CNT
OZFM_LD
SM4P
CN3
1
DRMCL_A
2
DRMCL_B
3
/DRMCL_A
4
/DRMCL_B
5
/DRMCL_CNT
6 /DRMBK_CNT
7
DRMBK_A
8
DRMBK_B
9
/DRMBK_A
10
/DRMBK_B
B12B-PHDSS-B
CN2
1
INT24V1
2
P-GND
3
5VN
B3P-VH
3
1
2
4
R
(Ozone FAN)
OZFM
DRIVER SUB
PWB
(LCC OPTION)
WH
(DESK OPTION)
WH
F.G.
F.G.
1
2
1
2
1
2
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
1
2
CN-A
NC
4
TXD_LCC
7
RXD_LCC
8
/DTR_LCC
9
/DSR_LCC
10
RES_LCC
11
NC
3
5VN
5
D-GND
6
24V4
1
P-GND
2
/TRC_LCC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
CN-F
24V4
1
P-GND
2
5VN
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
TXD_DSK
6
RXD_DSK
7
/DTR_DSK
8
DSR_DSK
9
RES_DSK
10
/TRC_DSK
11
NC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
F.G.
4
12
5
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
P
1
3
2
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
F-GND
EL 12PIN
NC
NC
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
EL 15PIN
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
F-GND
EL 3PIN
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK
RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK
SM 11PIN
4
12
5
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R
1
3
2
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P
F.G.
F.G.
F.G.
(WH-DESK_LCC harness)
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
2
D-GND
8
/TRC_LCC
B26B-PHDSS-B
10
4
12
6
14
CN21
D-GND
1
TXD_DSK
9
RXD_DSK
3
/DTR_DSK
11
5
DSR_DSK
13
RES_DSK
7
/TRC_DSK
5
1
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
CN4(B4P(5-3)-VH)
4
WH_L(DESK)
2
WH_N(DESK)
PSU
5VN
D-GND
B6P-VH
P-GND
B8P-VH
24V4
B7P-VH
WH PWB
CN4
3
6
CN7
7
CN8
6
PCU PWB
FINISHER
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INSERTOR
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
CN
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
NC
5VN
D-GND
NC
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
EL 12PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
F.G.
TO COIN VENDOR
(OPTION)
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
15
D-GND
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN21
16
17
18
19
20
CN29
1
24V3
2
P-GND
3
/CV_COPY
4
/CV_COUNT
5
/CV_START
6
/CV_CA
7
/CV_CLCOPY
8
/CV_COLOR1
9
/CV_STAPLE
10
/CV_COLOR0
/CV_DUPLEX
11
12
5VN
13
/CV_SIZE0
14
/CV_SIZE1
15
/CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
CN4
4
CN7
6
CN8
7
5VN
B6P-VH-B
P-GND
B8P-VH-B
24V5
B7P-VH-B
PCU PWB
PSU
CN18
B6P-VH
CN144
FG
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
3
1
2
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
F-GND
ORS LED PWB
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
1
2
3
1 /DETECT
2
D-GND
3 /DET_ANC
4
NC
5 TXD_ANC
6
NC
7 RXD_ANC
8
NC
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
(CCD-F harness 1)
MOTHER PWB
B30B-PHDSS-B
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN146
CN19
B10B-PHDSS-BCN143
501190-4017
B12B-PHDSS-BCN5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
(CCD-F harness 1)
B15P-PH-K-S
CN147
B15P-PH-K-S
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
(SCN-LAMP
FFC)
B15P-PH-K-S
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
1
2
B15P-PH-K-S
CN130
1
2
3
4
5
CL INVERTOR
PWB
SCAN IN PWB
501190-2017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
501190-2017
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-BCN3
CL
CN3
MIRROR
MOTOR
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B
3
2
1
MHPS
DOCC PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
SCN-CNT PWB
CN134
CN137
CN148
CN136
5VEXT
1
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
24VEXT
4
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CN1
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
OCSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
5
4
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
501190-4017
1
/DETECT
2
D-GND
3 /DET_ANC
5 TXD_ANC
7 RXD_ANC
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_ANC
RXD_ANC
D-GND
D-GND
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
4
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
CCD PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CN3
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
11
12
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_SCN
RXD_SNC
D-GND
D-GND
NC
NC
CN138 B6P-VH-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKINSCANCLKIN+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
MHPS
D-GND
5V
(MHPS harness)
OPTION
B15P-PH-K-S
CARD
READER
(OPTION)
TO R-SPF
P-GND
P-GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V_EXT
AVCC
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
D-GND
SM6P
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
TO AUDITER
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
6
/C_CARD
2
5
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
4
/C_DATA
3
5
5V
2
D-GND
1
6
CN131
n A_PNC
1
n A_COPY
2
n A_CA
3
4
n A_READY
5
n A_AUD
6
5V
7
D-GND
8
24V
9
NC
10
n A_TC
11
24V
12
PNC-a
13
D-GND
B13P-PH-K-S
CN145
1
/C_CARD
2
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
/C_DATA
5
5V
6
D-GND
B6P-PH-K-R
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
(MFP OP
I/F FFC)
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT
29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+
25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+
22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+
19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
6
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
(LVDS I/F
FFC)
SCN-CNT PWB
CN142
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
SPPD1
4
SPPD2
5
24VPD
6
24VPD
7
5V_EXT
AVCC
8
SPFMCK
9
SPFMM1
10
11
SPFMM2
12
SPFMO1
13
SPFMO2
14
SPRMA
15
SPRMA/
16
SPRMB
SPRMB/
17
18
SPRMO1
19
SGS
20
STMPS
21
SRRC
22
SPFC
23
SPWS
24
SELA_
25
SELB_
26
SELC_
27
SSELO
28
SPPD4
29
SPFFAN
30
SPPD3
31
SPPD5
32
5VPD
33
D-GND
34
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
LCD UN
CN1
3
2
1
TOUCH
PANEL
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
(LCD
inverter LCD INVERTOR PWB
harness)
CN2
1
CCFT+
BACK
2
/CCFT
LIGHT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CN2
/CCFT
1
D-GND
2
24V_EXT
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
CN3
VO
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
CP
4
D-GND
5
M
6
3.3V_EXT
7
D0
8
D1
9
10
D-GND
D2
11
D3
12
D-GND
13
DISP
14
VEE
15
52746-1570 (LCD
FFC)
LVDS-P PWB
CN4
/YL(Y1)
1
XH(X1)
2
3
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
4
MFP OPE-P
PWB
(PSW
harness)
CN1
3
n PWRSW
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
POWER SW PWB
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
ORS PD PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
PDSEL0
1
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
TO EX TEL
TO LINE
MJ2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MJ1
1
2
3
4
5
6
MJ-66J-RD315
NC
NC
TEL1
TEL2
NC
NC
MJ-64J-RD315
NC
TEL1
L1
L2
TEL2
NC
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TX24-40R-10ST-H1
12V
AG
12V
AG
150VON
CION
48VON
HS1HS2CIEXHSSON1
SON2
ECON
MRON
TELID
NC
NC
NC
NC
DG
3.3V
DG
5VS
DG
SI3_RESSPK
MDM_ATXD
MDM_ARXD
MDM_ABITCLK
MDM_ASPCLK
RGDTMDM_CLK
AFERESBBITCLK
BSPCLK
BRXD
BTXD
HDMUTERHS-
SPEAKER
(BOARD TO
BOARD)
B3P-PH-K-S
SPSP+
NC
TX25-40P-8ST-H1
CN7
1
12V
2
P-GND
3
12V
4
P-GND
5
150VON
6
CION
7
48VON
8
HS19
HS210
CI11
EXHS12
SON1
13
SON2
14
ECON
15
MRON
16
TELID
17
NC
18
NC
19
NC
20
NC
21
GND
22
3.3V
23
GND
24
5VS
25
GND
26
SI3_RES27
SPK
28
ATXD
29
ARXD
30
ABITCLK
31
ASPCLK
32
RGDT33
MDM_CLK
34
AFE_RES35
BBITCLK
36
BSPCLK
37
BTXD
38
BRXD
39
HDMUTE40
RHS-
CN2
1
2
3
CN3
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
3.3V
4
3.3V
5
FAX_RXD(D)6
CNCT_FAX7
FAX_RXD(D)+
8
MSW_MONFAX_RXD(CS)+
9
RES_FAX10
FAX_RXD(CS)11
D-GND
12
FAX_TXD(D)13
RES_MPF14
FAX_TXD(D)+
15
FAX_WUP16
FAX_TXD(CS)+ 17
PLED18
FAX_TXD(CS)19
D-GND
20
FAX_CTS(D)21
D-GND
22
FAX_RTS(D)23
FLVPP
24
FAX_CTS(CS)25
26
5VO
FAX_RTS(CS)27
28
12V
3.3V
29
3.3V
30
D-GND
31
P-GND
32
S32B-PHDSS-B
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MOTHER
PWB
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
FAX_TXD(D)_N
n CNCT_FAX
FAX_TXD(D)_P
n MSW_MON
FAX_TXD(CS)_P
n RES_FAX
FAX_TXD(CS)_N
D-GND
FAX_RXD(D)_N
n RES_MPFC_FAX
FAX_RXD(D)_P
n WU_FAX
FAX_RXD(CS)_P
n PLED
FAX_RXD(CS)_N
D-GND
n FAX_RTS(D)
D-GND
n FAX_CTS(D)
FLVPP
n FAX_RTS(CS)
5VO
n FAX_CTS(CS)
12V
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B
BOARD TO BOARD
CN4
CN21
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUT-
CN5
MOTHER PWB
MFPC PWB
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
IDE_CBLID_N
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
CN8 USB-B
(HOST)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
USB2.0
5V
DD+
GND
CN26
CN9 USB-A
USB1.1
(DEVICE)
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
12V
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P
4
8
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+
TXCT
NC
NC
CT
RX+
RX-
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
IDE_CBLID_N
HDD
FAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
1
2
3
4
SCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
RXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
LAN
S
4
8
5
1
LAN
QR/P4 8P
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
12V
CN18
RS232C
RS232C
CN15
B4P-VH
TX25-100P-LT-H1E
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
4
HDDFM_LD
1
3
D-GND
2
2
HDDFM_PWM
3
1
12V
4
CN17
B10B-PHDSS-B
1
3
4
2
12V
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
HDD
SCANDATA3+ 1
SCANDATA3- 2
SCANCLKOUT+ 3
SCANCLKOUT- 4
SCANDATA2+ 5
SCANDATA2- 6
SCANDATA1+ 7
SCANDATA1- 8
SCANDATA0+ 9
SCANDATA0- 10
LCD_DATA0- 11
LCD_DATA0+ 12
LCD_DATA1- 13
LCD_DATA1+ 14
LCD_DATA2- 15
LCD_DATA2+ 16
LCD_CLK- 17
LCD_CLK+ 18
19
CH0_N
20
CH0_P
21
CH1_N
22
CH1_P
23
CH2_N
24
CH2_P
25
CLK_N
26
CLK_P
27
CH3_N
28
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N 29
ECLK_LSU_P 30
HSYNC_LSU_P 31
HSYNC_LSU_N 32
VSYNC_K_N 33
VSYNC_K_P 34
VSYNC_C_P 35
VSYNC_C_N 36
VSYNC_M_N 37
VSYNC_M_P 38
VSYNC_Y_P 39
VSYNC_Y_N 40
41
5VL
42
5VL
43
5VL
44
5VL
45
5VL
46
5VL
47
5VL
48
5VL
49
5VL
50
5VL
RXD_SCN 51
n CTS_SCN 52
53
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN 54
n RES_SCN 55
n RES_PCU 56
57
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU 58
TXD_PCU 59
n RTS_PCU 60
TXD_FAX(D) 61
TXD_FAX(CS) 62
RXD_FAX(D) 63
RXD_FAX(CS) 64
n RTS_FAX(D) 65
n CTS_FAX(D) 66
n RTS_FAX(CS) 67
n CTS_FAX(CS) 68
n RES_FAX 69
n CNCT_FAX 70
n WU_FAX2 71
n MSW_MON2 72
n POF_MFPC 73
n REQ_PIC 74
n CLR_PIC 75
76
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC 77
78
PWM
n CNCT_FAN 79
n RES_PIC 80
RES_MFP 81
82
PWM2
83
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT 84
n WU_FAX1 85
86
3.3V
87
3.3V
88
3.3V
89
5VO
90
12V
91
D-GND
92
D-GND
93
D-GND
94
D-GND
95
D-GND
96
D-GND
97
D-GND
98
D-GND
99
D-GND
100
D-GND
2
4
6
8
12V
HDDFM_PWM
D-GND
HDDFM_LD
CN22
5V_IN
5V_IN
5V_IN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PCI1_EXT
n PCI1_RST
PCI1_INTA_PU
EXT_REQ
EXT_GNT
EXTEND PCI
MFPC PWB
PCI1MAC_AD30
PCI1MAC_AD31
PCI1MAC_AD28
PCI1MAC_AD29
PCI1MAC_AD26
PCI1MAC_AD27
PCI1MAC_AD24
PCI1MAC_AD25
PCI1MAC_AD23
PCI1MAC_CBE3
PCI1MAC_AD21
PCI1MAC_AD22
PCI1MAC_AD19
PCI1MAC_AD20
PCI1MAC_AD17
PCI1MAC_AD18
PCI1MAC_CBE2
PCI1MAC_AD16
PCI1MAC_AD14
PCI1MAC_AD15
PCI1MAC_AD12
PCI1MAC_AD13
PCI1MAC_AD10
PCI1MAC_AD11
PCI1MAC_AD8
PCI1MAC_AD9
PCI1MAC_AD7
PCI1MAC_CBE1
PCI1MAC_AD5
PCI1MAC_AD6
PCI1MAC_AD3
PCI1MAC_AD4
PCI1MAC_AD1
PCI1MAC_AD2
PCI1MAC_CBE0
PCI1MAC_AD0
D-GND
PCI1MAC_IDSEL
PCI1MAC_PAR
PCI1MAC_FRAME
PCI1MAC_DVSEL
FX8C-60S-SV5
PCI1MAC_IRDY
PCI1MAC_TRDY
CN19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCI_STOP
PCI1_SERR
PCI1_PERR
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
FAXD_TXD_N
n CNCT_FAX
FAXD_TXD_P
n MSW_MON
FAXCS_TXD_P
n RES_FAX
FAXCS_TXD_N
D-GND
FAXD_RXD_N
n RES_MFP
FAXD_RXD_P
n FAX_WUP
FAXCS_RXD_P
n PLED
FAXCS_RXD_N
D-GND
n FAXD_RTS
D-GND
n FAXD_CTS
FLVPP
n FAXCS_RTS
5VO
n FAXCS_CTS
12V
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2nd FAX UN
(OPTION)
3. Signal list
Signal
name
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
ADUM_L
APPD1
APPD2
CCFT
CLI
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CPUFM
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DHSW
(Japan
only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
[Mechanical switch]
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Primary transfer separation clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADU motor lower [Stepping motor]
ADU transport path detection 1
[Transmission type]
ADU transport path detection 2
[Transmission type]
LCD backlight
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
Scanner lamp [Xenon lamp]
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1) [DC brush-less motor]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2) [DC brush-less motor]
Tray 1 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray vertical transport clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Paper feed motor [Brush-less
motor]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
1) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
2) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Controller cooling fan motor
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 2 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
Dehumidifier heater switch
[Seesaw switch]
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
DL_K
DM_CL
DM_K
DSW_ADU
Function/Operation
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Signal
name
DSW_C
DSW-F
Name
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover
open/close detection
Front door open/close switch
[Micro switch]
DSW-R
DVM_CL
F1
F1
F1
Fuse (1.25A250V)
F2
F3
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F4
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F101
F102
Fuse (T1AH250V)
F103
Fuse (T8AH250V)
F201
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F202
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F203
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F204
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F205
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F301
Fuse (T5AH250V)
FUM
HDDFM
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
HOPS
LSUSS1
DVM_K
MHPS
MIM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
MPGS
MPLD
Function/Operation
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Home
position
Manual
paper
feed unit
Signal
name
Name
MPUC
MPWD
MSW
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
OSM
OZFM
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
PFM
PGM
Polygon motor
[DC brushless motor]
Fusing after-detection
[Transmission type]
Paper exit detection
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(R side)
Paper exit drive motor
[Stepping motor]
Registration pre-detection
[Transmission type]
Registration detection
POD1
POD2
POD3
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
PPD1
PPD2
PSFM
PWRSW
REGS_F/R
RRM
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/
HUD_M
TNM_C
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper width.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power
source.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (storing
position).
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
Document size detection trigger.
PWB
name
Close
Open
VR203
Volume
Note
Manual
paper
feed unit
Manual
paper
feed unit
VR201
TNM_Y
Pin
No.
TNM_M
Connector
No.
Toner motor C
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor K
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor M
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
Volume
TNM_K
Connector level
L
H
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Signal
name
Name
Function/Operation
VR204
Volume
VR205
Volume
VR402
Volume
WTNM
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Note
[12] OTHERS
MX2700N
Service Manual
Item
1. System settings
A. System settings (General)
(1)
1)
2)
(2)
2)
3)
Enter a password.
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
(2) Enter a password on the text entry screen that will appear.
4)
2)
(3)
Item
Total Count
Job Count
Device Count
Default Settings
Display Contrast
Clock
X Date Format
X Daylight Saving Time Setting
Keyboard Select
List Print (User)
All Custom Setting List
Printer Test Page
X PCL Symbol Set List*1
X PCL Internal Font List*1
X PCL Extended Font List*1
X PS Font List*2
X PS Extended Font List*2
X NIC Page
Sending Address List*3
X Individual List
X Group List
X Program List
X Memory Box List
X All Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List
Paper Tray Settings
Tray Settings
X Tray 1
X Tray 2
X Tray 3
X Tray 4
X Tray 5
X Bypass Tray
Paper Type Registration
X User Type 1
X User Type 2
X User Type 3
X User Type 4
X User Type 5
X User Type 6
X User Type 7
Auto Tray Switching
Address Control
Direct Address / Program
X Individual
E-mail*4
Search Number
Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
File Format
Internet Fax*5
Search Number
Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
Compression
Internet Fax Report
X Group
Search Number
Group Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
X Program
Program Name
Settings
Address
Resolution
Exposure
Special Modes
X Amend/Delete
Custom Index
X User 1
X User 2
X User 3
X User 4
X User 5
X User 6
Fax Data Receive/Forward
Internet Fax Manual Reception*5
X Reception Start
X Manual Reception Key in Initial
Screen
Internet Fax Data Forward*5
Printer Condition Settings*1
Printer Default Settings
X Copies
X Orientation
X Default Paper Size
X Default Output Tray*6
X Default Paper Type
X Line Thickness
X 2-Sided Print
X Colour Mode
X N-Up Print
PCL Settings*1
X PCL Symbol Set Setting
X PCL Font Setting
X PCL Line Feed Code
X Wide A4
Postscript Settings*2
X Print PS Errors
Enable
-
1
Portrait
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Plain Paper
5
1-Sided
B/W
1-Up
3. PC-8
Internal Font, 0. Courier
0. CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
Disable
Disable
Item
Document Filing Control
Custom Folder Registration
X Folder Name
X Initial
X Password
X User Name
Amend/Delete Custom Folder
USB-Device Check
User Control*7
Amend User Information
1)
2)
3)
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator password.
(2) Touch the[OK] key.
4)
(2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
(3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Item
User Control
User Authentication Setting
X User Authentication
X Authentication Method Setting
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
(1)
(4)
Disable
Authenticate a User by
Login Name and
Password
Disable
Job is Stopped when the
Limit of Pages is Reached
8
Disable
Disable
-
Disable
Disable
Enable
Timer 60 min.
15 min.
Middle
Disable
60 sec.
Disable
6 sec.
English
Disable
Disable
0.0 sec.
Disable
Disable
Disable
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Item
Customize 3
X USB Memory Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
X Data Entry
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
Device Control
Original Size Detector Setting
X Original Detection Size
Combination
X Cancel Detection at Document
Glass
Disabling of Document Feeder*3
Original Feeding Mode*3
Disabling of Duplex
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7
Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8
Disabling of Tray Setting
Disabling of Finisher*9
Disabling of Offset
Disabling of Stapler*9
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*10
Disabling of Punch*11
Disabling of Colour Mode*12
Auto Paper Selection Setting
Registration Adjustment
X Auto Adjustment
Optimization of the Hard Disk
Tandem Connection Setting
X IP Address of Slave Machine
X Port Number
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Clear All Job Log Data
Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode
Copy Settings
Initial Status Settings
X Colour Mode
X Paper Tray
X Exposure Type
X Copy Ratio
X 2-Sided Copy
X Output
Exposure Adjustment
X Colour
Document Glass
Document Feeder
X B/W
Document Glass
Document Feeder
Rotation Copy Setting
Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
X Reduction
X Enlargement
Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
Initial Margin Shift Setting
X Side-1
X Side-2
Erase Width Adjustment
X Edge
X Centre
Card Shot Settings
X Original Size
X Fit to Page
Automatic Saddle Stitch*10
Initial Tab Copy Setting
Varies depending on
country and region
Disable
Disable
All Disabled
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0.0 mm
Disable
Disable
Plain Paper
0.0.0.0
50001
Disable
Disable
3
Full Colour
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Auto
1
1-Side to 1-Side
-
5
5
5
5
Enable
999
10 mm (1/2")
10 mm (1/2")
X: 86 mm (3-3/8") Y: 54
mm (2-1/8")
Disable
Enable
10 mm (1/2")
Item
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex
Copy
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
Initial Colour Balance Setting
Auto Colour Calibration
B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode
for Document Feeder*3
B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass
Network Settings
IP Address Setting
Enable TCP/IP
Enable NetWare
Enable EtherTalk
Enable NetBEUI
Reset the NIC
Ping Command
Printer Settings
Default Settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change
X Print Density Level
Colour
B/W
X Bypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in
Bypass Tray
Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Paper Select
X Job Spool Queuing
Interface Settings
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode*1
X I/O Timeout
X Enable USB Port
X USB Port Emulation Switching*1
X Enable Network Port
X Network Port Emulation
Switching*1
X Port Switching Method
Colour Adjustments
X Auto Colour Calibration
Image Send Settings*14
Operation Settings
X Default Display Setting
Mode
Hold settings for a while after
scanning has been completed
Switch Automatically to Copy
Mode Screen
X Initial Resolution Setting
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored
Scanner*4
Internet Fax*5
Fax*6
X Default Exposure
Exposure
Original Image Type
Moir Reduction
X Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
X Scan Complete Sound Setting
X The Number of File Name/Subject/
Body Keys Displayed Setting
X The Number of Direct Address
Keys Displayed Setting
Enable
Disable
Varies depending on
country and region.
3
3
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
20 sec.
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Switch at End of Job
-
Scanner*4 (Fax*6)
Disable
Disable
Disable
200x200dpi
200x100dpi
Standard
Settings
Auto
Text
Disable
Disable
Middle
6
6
Item
Factory default setting
X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
X Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Received Data Hold
Disable
Password Setting
X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
X Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
Disable Selection from the Address Book
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Direct Entry
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
Scan Settings*4
X Default Sender Set
X Default Colour Mode Settings
Colour Mode
Auto, Greyscale
B/W Mode
Mono 2
Disable Change of B/W Setting
Disable
in Auto Mode
X Initial File Format Setting
B/W
File Type
PDF
Compression Mode
MMR (G4)
Specified Pages per File
Disable
Colour/Grey
File Type
PDF
Compression Ratio
Medium
Specified Pages per File
Disable
X Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Black & White
MMR (G4)
Colour/Greyscale
Medium
X Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
X Maximum Size of E-mail
Disable
Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network
Folder)
X Default Address Setting
Disable
X Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Disable
Display Bcc Address on the Job Disable
Status Screen
X Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
Disable
USB Memory Scan
Disable
X Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
Internet Fax Settings*5
X Internet Fax Default Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Internet Fax Own Name and
Address Set
Auto Wake Up Print
Enable
Internet Fax Speaker Volume
Settings
Receive Signal
Middle
Communication Error Signal
Middle
Original Print on Transaction
Print Out Error Report
Report
Only
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
Single Sending
Print Out Error Report
Only
Broadcasting
Print Out All Report
Receiving
No Printed Report
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
X Internet Fax Send Settings
Internet Fax Reception Report
Disable
On/Off Setting
Internet Fax Reception Report
1 Hour
Request Timeout Setting
Number of Resend Times at
2
Reception Error
Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
Rotation Sending Setting
All Enable
Printing Page Number at
Enable
Receiver
X Internet Fax Receive Settings
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Enable
Duplex Reception Setting
Disable
Set Address for Data
Forwarding
Letter Size RX Reduce Print
Disable
POP3 Communication Timeout
60 sec.
Setting
Reception Check Interval
5 min.
Setting
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name
All Invalid
Setting
Internet Fax Output Setting*16
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Document Filing Settings
Default Mode Settings
Sharing Mode
Sort Method Setting
Date
Document Output Options
X Print
Copy
Enable
Printer
Enable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Enable
X Scan Send*4
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Enable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Enable
X Internet Fax Send*5
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCEnable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Disable
X Fax Send*6
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Enable
Item
Scan to HDD
Administrator Authority Setting
X Delete File
X Delete Folder
Default Colour Mode Settings
X Colour
X B/W
Default Exposure Settings
X Exposure
X Original Image Type
X Moir Reduction
Initial Resolution Setting
Colour Data Compression Ratio
Setting
Default Output Tray*16
Scan Complete Sound Setting
Delete All Quick Files
X Delete
X Delete quick files at power up.
(Protected file excluded)
Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Batch Print Settings
X Selection of [All Users] is not
allowed.
X Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
List Print (Administrator)
Administrator Settings List
X Copy
X Print
X Image Send*14
X Document Filing
X Security
X Common
X All Administrator Settings List
Image Sending Activity Report*14
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Scanner)
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Internet Fax)
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Fax)
Anti Junk Fax Number List*6
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List*5
Inbound Routing List*14
Document Admin List*14
Web Setting List*15
Metadata Set List*17
Security Settings
SSL Settings
X HTTPS
X IPP-SSL
Enable/Disable Settings
User Control
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Operation Settings
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
X Disable Auto Key Repeat
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
Device Control
X Disabling of Document Feeder*3
X Disabling of Duplex
X Disabling of Large Capacity
Cassette*7
X Disabling of Optional Paper
Drawer*8
X Disabling of Tray Setting
X Disabling of Finisher*9
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Item
Factory default setting
X Disabling of Offset
Disable
X Disabling of Stapler*9
Disable
X Disabling of Punch*11
Disable
X Disabling of Colour Mode*12
Disable
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Disable
Copy Settings
X Disable Copy in Different Size/
Disable
Direction
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
Copy
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Disable
Printer settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Enable
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
Disable
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Disable
Paper Select
Image Send Settings
X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
X Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
Disable
USB Memory Scan
Disable
X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
X Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
Disable selection from the
Address Book
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Direct Entry
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
Document Filing Settings
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Disable
X Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not
Enable
allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is
Enable
not allowed.
Change Administrator Password
See "TO THE
ADMINISTRATOR OF
THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide.
Product Key*18
Network Scanner Expansion Kit
Printer Expansion Kit
PS3 Expansion Kit
-
Item
Internet Fax Expansion Kit
E-mail Alert and Status
Application Integration Module
Serial Number
Storing/calling of System Settings
Restore Factory Defaults
Store Current Configuration
Restore Configuration
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
*2: This function is not available in some countries and regions.
*3: When an automatic document feeder is installed.
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion
kit must be installed.
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*6: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*8: When a paper drawer is installed.
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*10: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*11: When a punch module is installed.
*12: When a colour-related problem has occurred.
*13: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
*14: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
must be installed.
*15: When network connection is enabled.
*16: When a right tray is installed.
*17: When the application integration module is installed.
*18: Depending on the peripheral devices installed, it may not be
possible to use some settings.
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
TRAY1
CPFD1_S1
CPFD1_N2
CPFD1_N3
CPFD1_N4
CPFD1_S2
CPFD1_S3
CPFD1_S4
TRAY2
CPFD2_N3
CPFD2_N4
CPFD2_S2
CPFD2_S3
CPFD2_S4
PPD1_N1
PPD1_N2
PPD1_N3
PPD1_N4
PPD1_NM
PPD1_NL
PPD1_NA
PPD1_S1
PPD1_S2
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Code
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SM
PPD1_SL
PPD1_SA
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N2
PPD2_N3
PPD2_N4
PPD2_NM
PPD2_NL
PPD2_NA
PPD2_S1
PPD2_S2
PPD2_S3
PPD2_S4
PPD2_SM
PPD2_SL
PPD2_SA
PPD2_PRI
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
APPD1_N
APPD1_S
APPD2_N
APPD2_S
TRAY3
DPFD1_N4
DPFD1_S3
DPFD1_S4
TRAY4
DPFD2_S4
MFT
MPFD_S
LCC
LPFD_SL
SIZE_ILG
MTR_ILG
FJPID_N
FJPID_S
FJPOD_N
FJPOD_S
FED_N
FED_S
FFPD_N
FFPD_S
FEXIT_S
FSTPL
FPNCH
FDOP
FIN_TIME
Code content
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD2 not-reached JAM
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2 remaining JAM
Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD notreached)
MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Size illegal JAM
Motor driver trouble JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle remaining JAM
Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
Staple JAM
Punch JAM
Finisher door open
Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
(2)
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
SPPD1_N
SPPD1_S
SPPD2_N
SPPD2_S
SPPD3_N
SPPD3_S
SPPD4_N
SPPD4_S
SPPD5_N
SPPD5_S
SPOD_N
SPOD_S
SPRDMD_S
SPSD_SCN
SPPD2_NR
SPPD2_SR
ICU_REQ
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 not-reached JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 not-reached JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD remaining JAM
Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU factor stop JAM
(1)
Front cabinet
Service
Manual
MX2700N
1) Remove the front cabinet band and the front cabinet hinge, and
remove the front cabinet.
(5)
(17)
(11)
(9)
(12)
(1)
(13)
(18)
(10)
(15)
(6)
(14)
(4)
2
1
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Parts
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Left cabinet rear lower
Left cabinet
Upper cabinet right
Upper cabinet left.
Upper cabinet rear cover
Upper cabinet rear
Front cabinet upper
Right cabinet front
Right connection cabinet
Right cabinet rear cover
Right cabinet rear
Paper exit cover
Paper exit tray cabinet
Left cabinet rear
Operation panel base plate
Frame cover
C
B
2
4
2
1
1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the upper cabinet right (A)
and the upper cabinet left (B).
A
1
1
2
3) Remove the screws, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screws, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screws,
and remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk
connection cover (E). Remove the screws, and remove the
right cabinet rear (F).
D
4
A
3
C
F
E
Remove the screws, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet
(B).
Remove the screws, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
1
A
C
CN4
1
2
3
4
LVDS-P PWB
FG
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN2
1
2
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
52746-1570
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
MFP OPE-P
PWB
SCN-CNT PWB
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
CN1
3
n PWRSW
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
CN2
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CCFT+
/CCFT
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
BACK LIGHT
CN2
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
CN1
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TOUCH PANEL
CN136
1
5VEXT
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT 29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+ 25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+ 22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+ 19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
6
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
MX2700N
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
Service Manual
OCSW
LCD
1
PWRSW
LCD INVERTOR
PWB
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
Name
Original cover SW
Operaton panel power supply switch
No.
1
2
3
Name
MFP OPE-P PWB
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Function/Operation
Timing switch for document size detection
Outputs the DC power supply ON/OFF control signal.
Function/Operation
Detects the key pressed on the operation panel.
Drives LCD and the backlight, and controls the touch-panel.
Receives the light from the document detection light emitting PWB, and detects the
document size.
Emits light for document size detection.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-P PWB, the
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
2) Remove the front cabinet upper and the operation panel base
plate.
3) Remove each cables and the grounding sheet.
Unit
Operation panel unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
POWER SW PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(1)-f
(1)-e
a. LCD INV PWB
b. LVDS PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD INV PWB (A). Remove the LVDS PWB (B).
c. LCD module
e. POWER SW PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.
d. Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD unit. Remove the flat cable.
MX2700N
[C]
SCANNER SECTION
Service Manual
MHPS
5
4
3
7
CLI
MIM
3
2
501190-4017
CN1
501190-2017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
CN134
CN130
CN148
CN147
CN137
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CCD PWB
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
1
2
CN3
1
2
3
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
MHPS
D-GND
5V
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
Signal
CLI
MHPS
MIM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Scanner lamp
Scanner home position sensor
Scanner motor
Name
Pulley belt
Pulley
Scanner drive wire
Reflector
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD PWB
Idle gear
SCN-CNT PWB
501190-4017
501190-2017
Function/Operation
Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Function/Operation
Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
Drives the scanner drive wire.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Condenses the copy lamp light.
Inducts the document image into the No.3 mirror.
Inducts the document image into the lens.
Reduces the document image (light), and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows:
1)
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the
reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and then converted into image signals (analog).
2)
The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter.
3)
The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
(1)
G
B
(Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2)
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3)
Red component of
image data
(4)
Green component of
image data
B
Blue component of
image data
1)
Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
2)
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
CCD PWB
The CCD element, appeared as one unit, but has three separate
rows of CCD elements drive each for (RGB).
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
3
CCD
IC
R ADC
IC
G ADC
IC
B ADC
Transfer IC
R
(5)
R
G
B
Zooming operation
(1)
A. Optical system
(1)-o
Scanner unit
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
3)
Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.
4)
5)
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-o
(1)-m
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-k
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h (1)-l
(1)-p
(1)-j
(1)-q
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-p
(1)-c
(1)-i
(1)
Unit
Scanner unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
(1)-d
Parts
Table glass
SPF glass
Lens
CCD
Reflector
Mirrors
Lamp
CL inverter PWB
CCD unit
Scanner motor
Scanner home position
sensor
Original cover SW
Document detection light
receiving PWB
Document detection light
emitting PWB
Rails
Drive wire
Drive belt
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
a. Table glass
b. SPF glass
1)
Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
1
4)
c. Lens
d. CCD
1)
2)
Remove the dark box cover (A) and the lens cover (B).
Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screws and
remove the wire.
A
2
B
5)
3)
While rotating the lamp unit, lift the lamp unit. Remove the harness holder and the flat cable. Remove the lamp unit.
A
2
1
e. Reflector
6)
f. Mirrors
1)
2)
3)
g. Lamp
h. CL inverter PWB
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home position sensor.
1
2
i. CCD unit
1)
l. Original cover SW
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
j. Scanner motor
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
2)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
p. Drive wire
1)
2)
q. Drive belt
1 * Install the drive wire in the sequence shown in the figure below.
7
4
7
3)
10 9 8 1
1 8 9 10
2
1
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting
the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the
main power source (the power switch inside the front cover) and
confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
If the copy lamp unit is manually moved with the main power ON, the
trouble code "F6-30" may occur.
If the trouble code "F6-30" is not canceled by turning OFF/ON the
main power, refer to the Service Manual (FAX self diagnostics and
the trouble codes).
o. Rails
4. Maintenance
A. Optical Section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Mirror/lens/
reflector/CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive
wire
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Mechanism parts
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Specified position
MX2700N
[D]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
Service Manual
CN1
2
PSFMA//
INT24V1
5
PSFMB//
3
PSFMA/
1
INT24V1
6
PSFMB/
4
B6B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
AC PWB
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
QR/P4 32PIN
CN26
15
31
30
14
28
13
S
5
4
/MPGS
/MPFS
/MPUC
24V3
1
2
4
3
5
6
B32B-PHDSS-B
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
5
4
3
2
1
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
10
5
4
D-GND
5VLED7
4
5
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
7
6
MPFD
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
D-GND
5VLED7
MPFD
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha
24V3
1
8
7
/MPFS
2
6
HPDET
3
CN3(2/2)
7
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
DF11-6DP-SP1
HPDET
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
PCU PWB
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
24V3
/MPUC
2
1
P
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
R
1
2
PFM
HPDET
D-GND
5VLED7
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
4
5
1
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
5VLED7
D-GND
MPFD
2
1
5
4
3
R
1
2
MPUC
1
2
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
6
4
2
5
3
1
P
1
2
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP2
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
MPGS
CN3(1/2)
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
5VN
MPWD
16
13
18
19
20
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H
12
MPLD
3
14
MPLD2
1
11
5VLED12
4
10
9
5VN
MPWD
MTOP2
22
MTOP2
24
5VLED13
3
TH_D/HUD_M
2
MPWD
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H
5
6
5VLED13
MPFS
MPFD
MPED
CPFM
6
5
4
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
4
5
6
1
2
3
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
3
2
1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
7
8
9
3
2
1
D-GND
5VN
MPWD
1
2
3
MTOP2
D-GND
5VLED13
MTOP1
25
MTOP1
5VLED9
27
5VLED9
10
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
5VN
28
HUD_M
29
D-GND
14
TH_M
31
S32B-PHDSS-B
4
3
2
1
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD
Signal name
CPFM
MPED
MPFD
MPDS
MPGS
MPLD
MPUC
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
PFM
Name
Paper feed motor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Paper pickup solenoid
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Manual feed paper length detector
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
Transport motor
TH_M/HUD_M
Temperature/humidity detection
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Paper feed section drive
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close.
Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive
between the resist roller and the right door section.
Detects temperature/humidity.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8.
Transports paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8.
2. Operational descriptions
The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and
separates the top paper, which is fed to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.. ON/OFF control of
the pickup roller and the paper feed roller is made by the manual
paper feed clutch. Paper is transported to the resist roller by the
manual paper transport roller.
(2)
(2)-i
(2)-e
(2)-b
(2)-g
(2)-a
(2)-h
(2)-c
(2)-f
(2)-d
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)
Unit
Manual
paper feed
tray unit
a
b
c
d
e
(2)
Manual
paper feed
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Temperature/humidity sensors
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Manual feed paper length
detector
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Manual feed paper entry
detection
Torque limiter
Manual feed paper empty
detection
Paper pickup solenoid
Maintenance
{
{
{
(1)
1)
5)
2
1
2)
a. Temperature/humidity sensors
b. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
c. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
d. Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
3)
1)
2)
3)
Disengage the pawl. Lift the MF tray upper and the MF tray 2,
and disconnect the connector.
2
3
4)
4)
Temperature/humidity sensor (A), manual paper feed tray pullout position detector 1 (B), manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2 (C)
A
B
C
5)
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
2)
3)
4)
c. Separation roller
1)
(2)
1)
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
3)
2)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
3)
5)
2)
3)
g. Torque limiter
1)
1
2
2)
3)
4)
2
1
5)
Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
1
3
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
2)
2
1
3)
8)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
5
4
2
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
PHNR-12-H+
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
5
CPFD1
4
5VN
12
D-GND
CLUD1
11
5VNPD
10
9
D-GND
8
CPED1
7
5VNPD
D-GND
3
DSW_R
2
5VN
1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
5
4
3
2
1
CPED2
6
1
3
10
9
5
7
8
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
CPFD1
11
PCU
CPUC2
DSW_R
D-GND
CSPD2
5VNPD
24V3
/CPFC
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
CLUD1
CPED1
24V3
/CPUC1
1
2
3
1
2
/CLUM1
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
1
2
24V3
/CPUC2
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
CSS1
D-GND
1
2
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
1
2
1
2
3
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
/CLUM2
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
2
1
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
DSW_R
5VN
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
CSS2
D-GND
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
1
2
3
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
2
1
S4P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CLUD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
1
2
3
S4P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
1
2
3
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
1
2
3
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
PCU PWB
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
B30B-PHDSS-B
DF1B-24p
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
DSW_R
CSPD1
CPWD11
CPWD12
CSS1
CSS2
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CPWD21
CPWD22
AC PWB
7
24
5
22
6
23
8
25
3
20
1
18
2
19
4
21
9
26
10
11
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
CN4
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
CN6
CPFD1
1
CLUD1
3
CPED1
5
DSW_R
7
CSPD1
9
CPWD11
21
CPWD12
23
CSS1
11
CSS2
10
CSS11
13
CSS12
15
CSS13
17
CSS14
19
CSS21
12
CSS22
14
CSS23
16
CSS24
18
CPFD2
2
CLUD2
4
CPED2
6
CSPD2
8
CPWD21
22
CPWD22
24
B24B-PHDSS-B
MX2700N
Service Manual
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
2
1
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPFC
CSS1
CSPD1
11
CLUD2
CPFD2
CSS2
CSPD2
Signal name
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED 1
CPED 2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DSW_C
Name
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray vertical transport clutch
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Paper feed motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 presence detection
Tray 2 presence detection
Tray 1, 2 transfer cover open/close detection
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Paper feed roller (No.1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Rotation plate
Function/Operation
Tray 1 upper limit detection
Tray 2 upper limit detection
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray 1 paper pass detection
Tray2 paper pass detection
Paper feed section drive
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Detects the presence of the tray 1
Detects the presence of the tray 2
Detects opening of the tray 1, 2 transport cover.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation
roller to prevent double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller
(No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper feed tray 1, 2 or 3, 4 to the transport
roller 8.
Lifts up the paper to keep the paper feed position.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects
the state of no remaining paper.
CPED
(paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
Detection Actuator
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
(1)
1)
2)
(1)-e
(1)-k
2
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-j
(1)-c
(1)-f
3)
4)
5)
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-c
(1)
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Tray paper
feed unit 1, 2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
(2)
Others
i
j
k
a
b
Parts
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Tray 1 transport cover
detection
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
Transport roller 4 (Drive)
Torque limiter
Tray 1, 2 paper presence
detection
Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection
Tray 1, 2 transport detection
Transport roller 5 (Drive)
Tray 1, 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
Tray 1, 2 presence detection
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
{
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
1)
2)
3)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit, and remove the belt.
1
c. Separation roller
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
2)
Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the separation shift. Remove the torque limiter.
3
2
1
1)
1)
2)
2)
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
2
1
1
3
1
3)
4)
5)
Remove the tray 1, 2 paper presence detector (a) and the tray
1, 2 upper limit detector (b).
1
2
3
2)
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 paper remaining quantity detector.
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 presence detector.
3)
2)
3)
4)
4
3
(2)
Others
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [11]-40)
(P/G No.: [11]-41)
(P/G No.: [10]-4)
MX2700N
Service Manual
RRM
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
PFM
1
2
CN1
2
PSFMA//
5
INT24V1
3
PSFMB//
1
PSFMA/
6
INT24V1
4
PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PPD2
3
PPD1
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
PPD1
5
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN17
29
31
D-GND
PPD1
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
32
PPD2
30
D-GND
23
5VNPD
27
D-GND
26
REGS_R
24 REGS_R_LED#
17
/PCSS
16
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU
PWB
DF11-6DP-SP1
Signal name
PFM
PPD1
PPD2
RRM
Name
Transport motor
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Resist motor
No.
1
Name
Resist roller (Drive)
2
3
Function/Operation
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive between the resist
roller and the right door section.
Detects paper before the resist roller.
Detects paper after the resist roller.
Controls the drive and ON/OFF of the resist roller.
Function/Operation
Transport paper to the transfer section./ Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relationship
between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to supply transport power of the transport roller to paper.
Transport the paper to the resist roller.
2. Operational descriptions
7)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the resist
roller unit.
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The resist roller
controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer
image. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by
the ON timing of the transport motor.
(1)-d
1)
2)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)
(1)
Unit
Resist roller
unit
a
b
c
d
e
Parts
Resist front detection
Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Resist roller (Drive)
Resist detection
Resist roller (Idle)
Maintenance
{
{
2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
3
4
1)
1)
2)
Remove the spring and the E-ring. Remove the JAM release
handle.
2)
3)
3)
Remove the parts. Slide the resist roller (Drive) to the front
side. Remove the parallel pin, the PS gear, and the E-ring from
the resist roller (Drive).
3
2
5
d. Resist detection
1)
2)
1
2
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark: Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
MX2700N
Service Manual
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
3
POD3
TFD3
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
7
8
9
APPD1
10
D-GND
11
5VLED5
12
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
APPD2
4
D-GND
5
5VLED10
6
S32B-PHDSS-B
3
DSW_ADU
2
D-GND
3
2
4
5VLED2
1
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
1
APPD1
3
2
D-GND
2
3
5VLED5
1
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
1
2
3
APPD2
D-GND
5VLED10
ADUM_L
DSW_ADU
APPD1
1
APPD2
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
Signal name
ADUM_L
APPD1
APPD2
DSW_ADU
POD3
TFD3
No.
1
2
3
Name
ADU motor lower
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
ADU transport open/close detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Name
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
CN5
ADMLA//
8
INT24V1
11
ADMLB//
9
ADMLA/
7
INT24V1
12
ADMLB/
10
B12B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Function/Operation
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Used to discharge paper.
2. Operational descriptions
(1)
1)
A. Duplex section
2
1
At that time, paper passes the right side of the ADU gate guide
by its own weight.
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower, and paper is transported to the duplex paper feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported to the inside of the machine again.
2)
(1)-e
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-h
(1)-f
(1)-j
(1)-g
(1)-a
(1)-k
(2)-a
(1)-i
(1)-b
(1)
(1)-l
a. RD I/F PWB
1)
2)
3)
(1)-m
(1)
Unit
Right door
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
(2)
Others
i
j
k
l
m
a
Parts
RD I/F PWB
Manual paper feed clutch
Discharge brush
Detects the right tray paper exit
full.
Right tray paper exit detection
ADU reverse gate
ADU gate lower
ADU transport open/close
detection
ADU transport path detection 1
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
ADU transport path detection 2
ADU motor lower
Maintenance
{
{
{
2)
3)
Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the connector, then remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
4)
4)
5)
6)
Remove each sensor mounting plate. Right tray paper exit full
detection (A), right tray paper exit detection (B)
c. Discharge brush
d. Detects the right tray paper exit full.
e. Right tray paper exit detection
1)
2)
2)
3
2
3)
Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit, and disconnect
the connector.
6)
2)
2
1
3
1)
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
4)
5)
5)
3)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
1
B
m. ADU transport path detection 2
1)
2)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Gears
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
2
1
2
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
Service Manual
MX2700N
10
10
10
1
2
P
1
2
R
PCU PWB
1
2
3
4
CN11
4
3
2
1
6
5
B7P-PH-K-S
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
LSUTH1
D-GND
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
S6B-XA
CN7
INT5V
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
n SCK_LSU
4
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN9
CH0_N
1
2
CH0_P
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
CH2_P
8
9
D-GND
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
12
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
13
CH3_P
14
15
D-GND
D-GND
16
HSYNC_LSU_N 17
HSYNC_LSU_P 18
D-GND
19
D-GND
20
ECLK_LSU_P
21
ECLK_LSU_N
22
S22B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
B6B-XA
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA
B20B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N
B22B-PHDSS-B
B4P-PH-K-R
3
4
B6P-PH-K-S
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
MOTHER PWB
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
LSUTH1
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
CN1
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
CN4
6
5
3
4
2
1
CN2 B12B-PHDSS-B
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
5
/SH_K
/ENB_K
7
6
DT_KDT_K+
4
2
D-GND
8
Vref_K
SK_K
10
9
n LDERR_K
11
LSUTH2
12
D-GND
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
10
9
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_K
/ENB_K
DT_KDT_K+
D-GND
Vref_K
SK_K
n LDERR_K
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_M
8
/ENB_M
7
DT_M6
DT_M+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_M
3
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M 1
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
LSU PWB
6 7
4
2
12
9
14
11 9
13
PGM
5
CN10
1
24V3
4
/LSUSS_B
B5P-PH-K-S
SM2P
LSUSS
24V3
/LSUSS_B
10
Signal name
PGM
Name
Polygon motor
Function/Operation
Laser beam is reflected at the constant speed rotation.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
LD PWB (K)
LD PWB (C)
LD PWB (M)
LD PWB (Y)
Cylindrical lens
f lens 1
f lens 2
Reflection mirror
Cylindrical lens
OPC drum
Convergence lens for BD
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
Function/Operation
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
14
LSU therminstor
2. Operational descriptions
(Scan system)
A. LSU section
(1)
Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the mother
are converted into laser beams to be radiated onto the OPC drum
surface. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system including
optical elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror which assures the optical path and the scan system which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path.
(2)
Composition
(Primary system)
(3)
Number of
mirror
surfaces
7 surfaces
Rotating
speed
Bearing
25106rpm
OIL
Remark
307mm
600dpi
Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
Max. 0.65mW
770 to 795nm
4)
A. LSU section
Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screws.
(2)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(2)-b
5)
Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
2
(1)
Unit
LSU
(2)
Others
(1)
1)
2)
a
b
a
b
Parts
Dust-proof glass
Polygon motor
LSU shutter solenoid
Cleaning base
Maintenance
{
LSU
Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. (Refer
to Left Cabinet Rear Lower and Left Cabinet in External Outfit
Section.)
3)
1
2
1)
2)
1
2
3)
Insert the LSU cleaning rod and slide it back and forth a few
times to clean the dust-proof glass.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the polygon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the polygon mirror and the mirror surface.
b. Polygon motor
(2)
1)
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
Others
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
shutter solenoid unit.
* When installing, the shutter U-groove is engaged with the
shutter lever arm shaft section (A).
3)
Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
(A).
Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).
3)
b. Cleaning base
1)
2)
3)
4. Maintenance
A. LSU section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
Dust-proof glass
Cleaning base
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
MC
GB-Y
MC
1
1
CN9
2
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN15
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_BK
GB
GB
GB
GB
MC
MC
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
3
1
1
3
CN1
3
6
4
1
5
2
23
21
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_BK#
1
1
3
D-GND
DL_BK#
D-GND
DL_C#
D-GND
DL_M#
D-GND
DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-B
4
2
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND
2
9
10
DL_C#
1
24
22
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_Y#
1
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
DL_M#
10
1
1
3
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
DMCLB//
1
INT24V1
2
DMCLB/
3
DMCLA/
4
INT24V1
5
DMCLA//
6
R
SM6
6
INT24V1
INT24V1
5
DMBKB//
4
DMBKB/
3
2
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
1
D-GND
DL_M#
53254-0310
DL_C
D-GND
DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_BK
D-GND
DL_BK#
53254-0310
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
MC PWB
AC
PWB
DL_Y
D-GND
1
DL_Y#
3
53254-0310
DL_M
MC-K
GB-K
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
PCU PWB
GB-C
1st TC PWB
GB-M
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
[i]
MC-CMY
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
MX2700N
Service Manual
DRIVER
SUB PWB
DMCL
DMBK
Signal name
DMCL
DMBK
DL
MC
GB
Name
Drum motor (Color)
Drum motor (Black)
Discharge lamp (Y, M, C, BK)
Main charge (Y, M, C, K)
Grid (Y, M, C, K)
Function/Operation
Color photoconductor drive
Black photoconductor drive
Light is passed to the discharge lens to drive the OPC drum surface.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
No.
1
2
Name
OPC drum (Y, M, C, K)
Cleaning blade
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images are formed.
Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface.
2. Operational descriptions
A. OPC drum section
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1)
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied to the screen grid.
2)
LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
LED lights
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i 2
4)
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
(1)-d
(1)-e
(1)-a
Lens
(1)
(1)-c
(1)-b
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Drum unit
(2)
Others
(1)
1)
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
Parts
Drum
Charging unit
Side seal F, R
Toner reception seal
Cleaner blade
Waste toner drive motor
Waste toner full detection switch
Maintenance
2)
6)
Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with both hands to
remove.
3)
a. OPC drum
1)
2)
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the developing unit on the left side
of each color drum unit.
Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front section.
1
2
b. MC charger unit
1)
5)
2)
3)
4)
5)
e. Cleaner blade
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
5)
6)
Release the pawl, and remove the process cover. Remove the
MC charger unit.
2
3
c. Side seal F, R
2)
3)
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
* When attaching the side seal F/R and the toner reception
seal, arrange so that they are in the ranges specified in the
figure below.
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
Reference
line
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
(2)
Others
0 - 0.3mm
1)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from the waste toner drive unit.
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
3)
1)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box empty lever.
Disengage the connector and the pawl, and remove the waste
toner full detection switch.
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
60
K
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade
(BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner, blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R (C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Mechanism
parts
400
K
120
K
300
K
500
K
600
K
180
K
700
K
800
K
240
K
900
K
1000
K
300
K
1100
K
1200
K
360
K
Remark: Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
MX2700N
Service Manual
TNM_Y
CRUM(Y)
TNM_M
TNM_C
CRUM(M)
CRUM(C)
CRUM(K)
1
TNM_K
1
1
1
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
CN12
6
4
10
12
2
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
2
3
4
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
2
4
5
6
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
5
6
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
9
10
7
8
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
7
8
6
CRM_Y_DT#
8
CRM_Y_CK#
B10B-PHDSS-B
9
10
P
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
9
10
R
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
3
1
D-GND
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
3
CRM_Y_CK#
1
D-GND
6
2
1
3
4
5
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PCU PWB
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
6
2
1
3
4
5
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
TNM_K_1
15
TNM_K_2
17
TNM_C_1
19
TNM_C_2
21
TNM_M_1
22
TNM_M_2
24
TNM_Y_1
18
TNM_Y_2
20
INT24V2
5
P-GND
3
/DVM_CL_CK
9
11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
1
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
DHPD_K
32
5VLED
30
DHPD_CL
31
5VLED
29
D-GND
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
Signal name
TNM
CRUM
No.
1
Name
Toner motor (Y, M, C, K)
CRUM (Y,M,C,K)
Function/Operation
Toner supply motor to the develping unit
Data memory for the toner cartridge
Name
Function/Operation
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
2. Operational descriptions
When the toner cartridge is inserted to the machine, the lock pawl
is disengaged and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport pipe shutter is opened and closed by the shaft which
is linked with the developing lever.
3. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Color supply
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Monochrome,
color supply
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
60
120
180
240
300
K
K
K
K
K
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
1200
K
360
K
TCS_Y
DVTYP_C
BS_M
DVTYP_Y
TCS_C
2
1
TCS_K
2
1
DVTYP_K
BS_K
TCS_M
2
1
BS_C
DVTYP_M
2
1
Service Manual
MX2700N
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS_Y
(SPRING)
BS-M
BS-C
BS-K
1
2
4
5
6
7
(SPRING)
BS-Y
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-K
(SPRING)
1
2
4
5
6
7
BS-C
(SPRING)
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
44
C
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
MC PWB
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
CN9
1
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
AC PWB
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
5
3
9
11
1
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
CN12
INT24V2
6
P-GND
4
10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
12
DVM_K_LD
2
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
CN15
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
B32B-PHDSS-B
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
B40B-PADSS-B
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-Y
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
BS-M
4
3
2
1
BLACK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
CYAN
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
MAGENTA
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
YELLOW
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
Signal name
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS
TCS
DVTYP
No.
1
2
3
Name
Developer motor (color)
Developer motor (black)
Developer bias (Y, M, C, K)
Toner density sensor (Y, M, C, K)
DV initial detection PWB (Y, M, C, K)
Name
Function/Operation
Color developing unit drive
Black developing unit drive
Developer bias
Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
Detection of a new developing unit (machine exclusive for CRU)
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
Stirring developer
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Developer roller
Stirring roller
Toner filter
2. Operational descriptions
A. Developing section
(1)-d
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported by the mixing roller.
Unit
Developing
unit
(1)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Developer
DV seal
DV side seal F
DV side seal R
DV initial PWB
Density sensor
Toner filter
Maintenance
Developing unit
1)
2)
3)
a. Developer
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
1)
2)
3)
A
B
4)
Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1 position for each color)
A
2
B
5)
A
B
1 : Dec. 15 2005
4)
Take out the old developer, and insert the new developer.
b. DV seal
c. DV side seal F
d. DV side seal R
1)
B
A
C
1 2)
Attach the new DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), DV side seal R
(C) to the reference position.
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
0 0.5mm
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
* When attaching, arrange so that the DV side seal F (C) and the
DV side seal R (D) are placed between the DV cover R (A) and
the DV blade (B).
D
B
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
e. DV initial PWB
g. Toner filter
f. Density sensor
1)
2)
1)
2)
B
A
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
60
K
Color supply
1
2
3
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
120
K
180
K
240
K
1200
K
300
K
360
K
5
6
7
8
Developer (Y)
9
10
DV seal (C)
DV side sheal F,
R (C)
Toner filter
Bias pin/
Connector
11
12
Color supply
Mechanism
parts
4,10
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
3,10
1100
K
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Monochrome
supply
500
K
12
12
12
MX2700N
Service Manual
1st TC PWB
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
6
INT24V2
5
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
4
/HV_CLK#
3
/HV_LD1#
2
HV_REM#
1
MC PWB
B6P-PH-K-S
5 6
14
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
2
1TUD_K
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
1TURC
2
1TUD_CL
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
24V3
/1TURC
2
1
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
CN26
P-GND
20
/HV_DATA#
21
/HV_CLK#
22
/HV_LD1#
23
HV_REM#
24
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
11
1TUD_CL
13
GND
9
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_K
12
D-GND
14
10
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN12
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
B32B-PHDSS-B
DVMK
1TUD_CL
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TUD_K
3
2
PCU PWB
10
2TC
12
2-TC
1TNFD
11
13
WTNM
Signal name
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
2TC
DVMK
WTNM
Name
CLR
2nd TC PWB
1TNFD
D-GND
P
1
2
1
2
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
R
1
2
R
3
4
5
6
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA#
3
/TC_LD#
5
/HV_REM#
6
B6P-PH-K-S
SM18PIN
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
P
3
4
5
6
CN34
2
4
6
8
10
12
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
B40B-PADSS-B
CN9
1TNFD
1
2
D-GND
17
WTNM_1
18
WTNM_2
B30B-PHDSS-B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
Intermediate transfer blade
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer roller
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Roller cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
Registration backup roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary belt transfer roller
Secondary belt tension roller
Primary transfer CL roller
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage is applied to transfer images to the
intermediate transfer belt and toner images on the intermediate
transfer belt are transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the transfer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
The arm performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only
black contact.
1TUD_CL
ON
OFF
OFF
1TUD_K
OFF
ON
OFF
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
2)
3)
4)
A. Primary transfer
(2)-a
(1)-a
(2)-b
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1)
(1)-o
(1)-m
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-k
(1)-e
(1)-l
(1)-f
(1)-d
(1)-h
(1)
(2)
Unit
Primary
transfer unit
Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
a
b
(1)
1)
Parts
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer CL roller
Intermediate transfer blade
Primary transfer roller
Primary transfer conduction
collar
Y auxiliary roller
Belt drive gear
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Roller cleaning brush
Registration backup roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner reception seal
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Maintenance
{
{
{
5)
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L 3
5)
2)
3)
4)
Turn the belt twice (in the direction described in step 3).
* There may be some traces of strontium titanate left on the
surface of the belt.
6)
[Bottom surface]
Cleaner unit
side
CL roller side
[Figure 1]
5)
Fold the CL section of the transfer frame and remove the intermediate transfer belt.
[Figure 3]
12
34
5A
B
-67
* When installing, set the lot number inside the belt to the front
side.
[Precautions for installation]
When replacing the belt, make sure not to scratch or fold it.
Do not touch the surface of the belt with bare hands.
(Applying the start powder)
1)
2)
Apply the side seal powder (stearic acid) uniformly on the surface of the belt (Figure 1).
* Apply the side seal powder uniformly on half of the surfaces
on both sides of the belt.
Cleaner
unit side
CL roller side
* Rub the belt with a cloth bag containing the side seal powder
so that the powder will be applied onto the belt.
3)
Turn the belt a 1/4 turn. (For the direction of the turn, see Figure 3.)
4)
2)
3)
3)
2)
3)
4)
A
A
3
C
B
B
B
2)
1)
2)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
m. Cleaner seal
j. Tension roller
n. Cleaner seal R
1)
2)
3)
4)
Clean the trasnfer follower roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
1)
2)
3)
Remove the cleaner seal (A) and the cleaner seal R (B).
B
A
* When attaching the seals, position the seals within the specified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated
below.
0 - 0.3mm
2)
3)
4)
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
Reference line
2)
3)
(1)
1)
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
2
0 - 0.3mm
(2)
Others
2)
2)
3)
4)
3
B
1
2
B. Secondary transfer
(1)-f
1)
2)
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-e
3
2
(1)-g
(1)
(1)-d
1
(1)-b
A
(1)
Unit
Secondary
transfer unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Secondary transfer idle gear
Secondary belt follower roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary trasnfer belt drive
roller
Roller cleaning brush
Secondary belt tension roller
Maintenance
3)
4)
2)
3)
1
f. Roller cleaning brush
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
2)
2)
3)
Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the secondary transfer roller.
1
2
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Intermediate
transfer belt
Primary transfer
roller
Intermediate
transfer blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Registration
backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt
drive roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [26]-3)
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
19
20
3
8
7
10
21
17
19
11
2
12
9
14
6
13
15
16
9 11
18
3
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
10
2,5
MX2700N
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1
CN17
24V3
/PCSS
16
17
15
14
24V3
/PCSS
15
14
2
1
PCU PWB
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
24
26
27
23
13
12
11
10
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
13
12
11
10
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
RESI SENSOR R
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
18
19
21
28
9
8
7
6
5
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
22
20
25
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
SM18P
B32B-PHDSS-B
Signal name
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
REGS_F/R
Name
Process control sensor
Process control shutter solenoid
Resist sensor
2
1
P
4
3
2
1
REGS_R
PCSS
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
RESI SENSOR F
PCS_CL/K
REGS_F
Function/Operation
Detects the toner patch density.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
Detects the resist shift.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).
a. Resist sensor
2)
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)
Unit
Process
control
sensor unit
(1)
(1)-a
(1)
a
b
c
Parts
Resist sensor
Process control sensor
Process control shutter
solenoid
Maintenance
{
{
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
18
Parts name
Sensors
(Process
control resist
sensors)
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
18
MX2700N
[N]
FUSING SECTION
Service Manual
DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
4
3
2
1
R
SM18PIN
16
TH_UMCS_IN
16
15
D-GND
15
26
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
CN9
CN34
14
TH_LM_IN
14
29
13
TH_US_IN
13
12
TH_UM_IN
12
27
TH_US_IN
30 TH_UMCS_IN
25
TH_UM_IN
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN3
N-HL(LOW)
2
N-HL(SUB)
3
1
L-HL(COM)
B03P-VL-R
CN2
L-HL(COM)
3
L-HL(COM)
2
N-HL(MAIN)
1
B03P-VL-K
5
2
4
1
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(MAIN)
6
3
5
2
4
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(LOW)
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
DRAWER RWZ
PCU PWB
HL PWB
CN4
/HLPR
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_LM
D-GND
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
FUM
2
1
3
1
2
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
4
3
2
3
1
2
1
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H +
BU03P-TR-P-H
6
3
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
1
INT24V1
D-GND
3
11
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
9
HLOUT_UM
7
/HLPR
5
B40B-PADSS-B
RTH1
HLTS1
HLTS2
RTH2
2
HLTS3
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
Signal name
RTH1
RTH2
HLTS1
HLTS2
HL_UM
Name
Fusing temperature sensor (1)
Fusing temperature sensor (2)
Thermostat (1)
Thermostat (2)
Heater lamp (1)
2
RTH3
Function/Operation
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Signal name
HL_US
RTH3
HLTS3
HL_LM
FUM
No.
1
2
3
Name
Heater lamp (2)
Fusing temperature sensor (3)
Thermostat (3)
Heater lamp (3)
Fusing motor
Name
Fusing roller (Heating)
Pawl
Fusing roller (pressing)
Function/Operation
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating).
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Drives the fusing unit.
Function/Operation
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Paper which was not separated naturally from the fusing roller (heating) is mechanically separated.
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2. Operational descriptions
The upper and the lower heat rollers are provided to heat from
above and below.
PCU
FUM
2)
The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without deformation to fuse on paper.
3)
C. Fusing operation
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat
rollers to be fused on paper.
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly
actual colors of document images.
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
of the upper heat roller, and at the center of the lower heat roller.
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
the specified level.
The fusing temperature is switched according to the machine condition and paper type selected.
Mode
Ready state
Print mode
Paper
B/W normal
paper
Color normal
paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Fusing
roller center
(heating)
main
170
Fusing
roller
(heating)
sub
180
170
180
130
170
170
180
175
170
180
140
145
145
Fusing
roller
(pressing)
130
2)
A. Fusing section
(1)-j
(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-i
(1)-n
(1)-l
(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-a
a. Upper thermostat
(1)-b
(1)
1)
2)
3)
(1)-d
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h
(1)
(1)
1)
Unit
Fusing unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
Parts
Upper thermostat
Upper thermistor
Non-contact thermistor
Lower thermostat
Lower thermistor
Upper heater lamp main
Upper heater lamp sub
Lower heater lamp
Upper heat roller
Upper heat roller gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller gear
Lower heat roller bearing
Upper separation pawl
Maintenance
Fusing unit
Open the right door unit.
2
1
b. Upper thermistor
1)
2)
3)
e. Lower thermistor
1)
2)
3)
c. Non-contact thermistor
1)
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the non-contact thermistor.
f. Upper heater lamp main
g. Upper heater lamp sub
1)
2)
d. Lower thermostat
1)
2)
3)
Tilt the lock lever, and remove the fusing upper cover R.
1
2
3)
5)
4)
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
5)
6)
Remove the upper heat roller unit, and remove the parts.
2)
3)
4)
5)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the lower heat roller unit, and remove the parts
2)
3)
2)
3)
4. Maintenance
A. Fusing section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [32]-32)
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
(P/G No.: [32]-30)
Specified position
(P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
12
6
1
9
7
8
3
4
7
11
11
8
5
11
MX2700N
[O]
PAPER EXIT SECTION
Service Manual
DF11-4DP-SP1
3
2
1
4
5
7
3
1
6
8
2
4
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD2
1
R
5
1
2
3
4
TFD2
HOPS
SM6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
1
2
3
4
5
24
7
9
11
13
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
TFD2
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
1
2
3
14
POD2
14
12
POD2
5VNPD
HOPS
D-GND
1
2
3
15
HOPS
15
16
HOPS
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
1
2
3
16
17
12
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUMA/
FUMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMA//
FUMB//
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
R
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SM-12p
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
FUMA/
FUMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMA//
FUMB//
P
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Name
Fusing drive motor
Shifter home position detection
Shifter motor
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Paper exit drive motor
Paper exit full detection
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
10
Signal name
FUM
HOPS
OSM
POD1
POD2
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
TFD2
1
2
3
4
5
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
13
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
FUM
CN13
15
17
19
21
22
TFD2
6
5
4
3
2
1
POD1
POFM_F
S
6
7
11
8
9
13
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POD2
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
POM
POFM_R
P
5
1
2
3
4
P
6
7
11
8
9
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
OSM
DF11-8DP-SP2
Function/Operation
Drives the fusing unit.
Detects the shifter home position.
Offsets the paper.
After fusing, paper exit from fusing section is detected.
Detects the exit paper.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
POD1
14
2
D-GND
18
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CN6
4
POMB/
6
INT24V1
1
POMA/
3
POMB//
5
INT24V1
2
POMA//
7
FUMA/
FUMB/
10
12
INT24V1
INT24V1
11
8
FUMA//
9
FUMB//
B12B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
1 : Dec. 15 2005
No.
1
2
Name
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the fixing roller to the transport roller 13.
Paper transported from the transport roller 9 is transported to the paper exit roller 1. / Paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray. / Paper is transported to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2. Operational descriptions
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the transport roller 13 which is driven by the paper exit drive motor and to
the paper exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
1)
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-n
(1)-h
(1)-i
2)
(1)-d
(1)-k
(1)-n
(1)-l
(1)-m
(1)
A
Unit
Paper exit
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
(1)
1)
Parts
Exit paper full detection sensor
Shifter home position detection
sensor
Paper exit detection sensor
After-fusing sensor
Paper exit cooling fan motor
Discharge brush
Shifter motor
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Fusing drive motor
Paper exit drive motor
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Maintenance
2)
{
{
2
1
3)
3)
f. Discharge brush
1)
2)
3)
Remove the discharge grounding plate, and remove the discharge brush.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the parts. Slide the bearing, and remove the shifter
unit.
4
3
2
2
5)
Remove the parts, and remove the paper exit roller 1 (drive).
g. Shifter motor
1)
2)
1)
2)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
2)
m. Discharge brush
1)
2)
00.5mm
k. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the E-ring, the reverse drive belt, and the pulley.
00.5mm
* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attachment
reference.
n. Paper exit filter
1)
5)
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the transport
roller 13 (Drive).
2
1
2)
Open the filter holding sheet, and remove the paper exit filter.
2)
3)
4)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
4. Maintenance
A. Paper exit section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
1
2
3
Parts name
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
MX2700N
3) Remove the
flywheel.
Service
Manual
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-c
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-f
KM
(1)-g
KM
(1)
(1)
Unit
Main drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Parts
Toner motor
Developer drive motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Drum motor (CL)
Resist motor
Phase detection PWB
Separation clutch
4)
5)
1)
2)
a. Toner motor
1)
2)
1)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the toner
motor.
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the drum
motor (K) and the drum motor (CL).
A
b. Developer drive motor (K)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the developer drive motor (K).
f. Resist motor
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connctor and the screws, then remove the resist
motor.
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the developer drive motor (CL).
2)
4)
h. Separation clutch
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the gear, and remove the separation clutch. Then disconnect the connector.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws. Release the pawl, then
remove the filter box unit.
5)
Remove the connector and remove the paper feed drive unit.
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-b
a. Transport motor
(1)-c
1)
(1)-e
(1)-c
(1)
(1)
Unit
Paper feed drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the transport motor.
Parts
Transport motor
Paper feed motor
Paper tray lift-up motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray vertical transport clutch
1)
2)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
feed motor.
5)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
tray lift-up motor unit.
6)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
5)
6)
7)
5)
6)
2. Maintenance
A. Drive Section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Gears (Gease)
Shaft Grounding
Section
(Conduction
Grease)
Belts
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
When checking
HANARL FL955R/
FLOIL G313S, apply
to the necessary
positions. (Specified
positions)
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions. (Specified
positions)
(FLOIL G313S)
(HANARL FL955R)
MX2700N
(1)
ControlManual
Box
Service
a. BOOT ROM PWB
A. PWB
1)
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
(3)-a
(3)-b
(3)-c
(3)-e
(3)-d
(3)-i
(3)-g
(3)-h
(2)-a
(2)-b
* When placing the unit with the HDD upside, remove the
DIMM memory or insert a spacer in order to protect the
DIMM memory from pressure.
(3)-f
(1)-g
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-d
(1)-h
DIMM3
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-b
DIMM2
DIMM4
DIMM1
(1)
Unit
Control Box
(2)
(3)
Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
MFP cht PWB
HDD
PCU Flash ROM PWB
PCU PWB
SCAN IN PWB
Mother PWB
AC Power PWB
DC Power PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
Scanner Control PWB
HL PWB
Driver Sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Driver Main PWB
Primary transfer PWB
High Voltage MC PWB
HVR PWB
DIMM1
DIMM2
DIMM3
DIMM4
MX-2300/2700 G
Option (256MB)
256MB
512MB
256MB
MX-2300/2700 N
512MB
512MB
256MB
<1> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both
hands.
3)
Release the lock, and remove the BOOT ROM PWB (A) and
the PROGRAM ROM PWB (B).
B
2
<2> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both
hands simultaneously until the right and the left buttons
are locked.
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screws and then remove the MFP cnt PWB.
d. HDD
1)
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
3)
Remove the connector and screws then remove the HDD unit.
4)
f. PCU PWB
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the PCU
PWB.
1)
2)
2)
h. Mother PWB
1)
2)
3)
(2)
4)
5)
a. AC Power PWB
1)
2)
b. DC Power PWB
1)
2)
(3)
Others
3)
1)
2)
Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the filter
box unit.
2
1
1)
1)
2)
Remove the screws, and pull out the scanner control PWB
unit. Then remove the connector.
2)
3)
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the secondary transfer PWB.
c. HL PWB
1)
2)
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the driver
main PWB.
4)
Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the primary transfer PWB unit.
5)
2)
3)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the primary transfer PWB.
h. MC PWB
1)
2)
3)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the HVR
PWB.
KM
KM
MX2700N
[R]
FAN AND FILTER SECTION
Service Manual
B. Fans
A. Filters
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1)
Parts
(1)
(1)
1)
Ozone Filter
Maintenance
Ozone Filter
Remove the ozone filter cover, then remove the ozone filter.
Parts
Controler cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Power supply cooling fan motor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Maintenance
1)
2)
(2)
4)
1)
2)
(4)
3)
(3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the HDD
cooling fan motor.
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the ozone
fan motor from the filter box unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the power
supply cooling fan.
1)
2)
3)
2. Maintenance
A. Filters
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Ozone filter PA
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
MX2700N
[S]
SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
3) Remove the
screws, then remove the main switch unit.
Service
Manual
4)
(4)
Remove the connector and the pawl, then remove the main
switch.
* Take care of connecting the connectors when installing.
(2)
(1)
3
(3)
3
2
2
R
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Parts
Main Switch
Dehumidifier Heater Switch
Front Door Open/Close Switch
Right Door Open/Close Switch
Main Switch
1)
2)
(2)
(4)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the right
door open/close switch cover unit.
6)
(3)
1)
2)
Remove the screws and then remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
Remove the connector and the screws and then remove the
front door open/close switch.
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2006 January Printed in Japan